APE Price: $1.51 (+5.25%)

Contract Diff Checker

Contract Name:
ERC721CMRoyalties

Contract Source Code:

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

abstract contract OwnablePermissions is Context {
    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "./ICreatorTokenTransferValidator.sol";

interface ICreatorToken {
    event TransferValidatorUpdated(address oldValidator, address newValidator);

    function getTransferValidator() external view returns (ICreatorTokenTransferValidator);
    function getSecurityPolicy() external view returns (CollectionSecurityPolicy memory);
    function getWhitelistedOperators() external view returns (address[] memory);
    function getPermittedContractReceivers() external view returns (address[] memory);
    function isOperatorWhitelisted(address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function isContractReceiverPermitted(address receiver) external view returns (bool);
    function isTransferAllowed(address caller, address from, address to) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "./IEOARegistry.sol";
import "./ITransferSecurityRegistry.sol";
import "./ITransferValidator.sol";

interface ICreatorTokenTransferValidator is ITransferSecurityRegistry, ITransferValidator, IEOARegistry {}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

interface IEOARegistry is IERC165 {
    function isVerifiedEOA(address account) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../utils/TransferPolicy.sol";

interface ITransferSecurityRegistry {
    event AddedToAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, address indexed account);
    event CreatedAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, string indexed name);
    event ReassignedAllowlistOwnership(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, address indexed newOwner);
    event RemovedFromAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, address indexed account);
    event SetAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, address indexed collection, uint120 indexed id);
    event SetTransferSecurityLevel(address indexed collection, TransferSecurityLevels level);

    function createOperatorWhitelist(string calldata name) external returns (uint120);
    function createPermittedContractReceiverAllowlist(string calldata name) external returns (uint120);
    function reassignOwnershipOfOperatorWhitelist(uint120 id, address newOwner) external;
    function reassignOwnershipOfPermittedContractReceiverAllowlist(uint120 id, address newOwner) external;
    function renounceOwnershipOfOperatorWhitelist(uint120 id) external;
    function renounceOwnershipOfPermittedContractReceiverAllowlist(uint120 id) external;
    function setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(address collection, TransferSecurityLevels level) external;
    function setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(address collection, uint120 id) external;
    function setPermittedContractReceiverAllowlistOfCollection(address collection, uint120 id) external;
    function addOperatorToWhitelist(uint120 id, address operator) external;
    function addPermittedContractReceiverToAllowlist(uint120 id, address receiver) external;
    function removeOperatorFromWhitelist(uint120 id, address operator) external;
    function removePermittedContractReceiverFromAllowlist(uint120 id, address receiver) external;
    function getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address collection) external view returns (CollectionSecurityPolicy memory);
    function getWhitelistedOperators(uint120 id) external view returns (address[] memory);
    function getPermittedContractReceivers(uint120 id) external view returns (address[] memory);
    function isOperatorWhitelisted(uint120 id, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function isContractReceiverPermitted(uint120 id, address receiver) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../utils/TransferPolicy.sol";

interface ITransferValidator {
    function applyCollectionTransferPolicy(address caller, address from, address to) external view;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

/** 
 * @dev Used in events to indicate the list type that an account or 
 * @dev codehash is being added to or removed from.
 * 
 * @dev Used in Creator Token Standards V2.
 */
enum ListTypes {
    // 0: List type that will block a matching address/codehash that is on the list.
    Blacklist,

    // 1: List type that will block any matching address/codehash that is not on the list.
    Whitelist
}

/** 
 * @dev Used in events to indicate the list type that event relates to.
 * 
 * @dev Used in Creator Token Standards V1.
 */
enum AllowlistTypes {
    // 0: List type that defines the allowed operator addresses.
    Operators,

    // 1: List type that defines the allowed contract receivers.
    PermittedContractReceivers
}

/**
 @dev Defines the constraints that will be applied for receipt of tokens.
 */
enum ReceiverConstraints {
    // 0: Any address may receive tokens.
    None,

    // 1: Address must not have deployed bytecode.
    NoCode,

    // 2: Address must verify a signature with the EOA Registry to prove it is an EOA.
    EOA
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the constraints that will be applied to the transfer caller.
 */
enum CallerConstraints {
    // 0: Any address may transfer tokens.
    None,

    // 1: Addresses and codehashes not on the blacklist may transfer tokens.
    OperatorBlacklistEnableOTC,

    // 2: Addresses and codehashes on the whitelist and the owner of the token may transfer tokens.
    OperatorWhitelistEnableOTC,

    // 3: Addresses and codehashes on the whitelist may transfer tokens.
    OperatorWhitelistDisableOTC
}

/**
 * @dev Defines constraints for staking tokens in token wrapper contracts.
 */
enum StakerConstraints {
    // 0: No constraints applied to staker.
    None,

    // 1: Transaction originator must be the address that will receive the wrapped tokens.
    CallerIsTxOrigin,

    // 2: Address that will receive the wrapped tokens must be a verified EOA.
    EOA
}

/**
 * @dev Used in both Creator Token Standards V1 and V2.
 * @dev Levels may have different transfer restrictions in V1 and V2. Refer to the 
 * @dev Creator Token Transfer Validator implementation for the version being utilized
 * @dev to determine the effect of the selected level.
 */
enum TransferSecurityLevels {
    Recommended,
    One,
    Two,
    Three,
    Four,
    Five,
    Six,
    Seven,
    Eight
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the caller and receiver constraints for a transfer security level.
 * @dev Used in Creator Token Standards V1.
 * 
 * @dev **callerConstraints**: The restrictions applied to the transfer caller.
 * @dev **receiverConstraints**: The restrictions applied to the transfer recipient.
 */
struct TransferSecurityPolicy {
    CallerConstraints callerConstraints;
    ReceiverConstraints receiverConstraints;
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the security policy for a token collection in Creator Token Standards V1.
 * 
 * @dev **transferSecurityLevel**: The transfer security level set for the collection.
 * @dev **operatorWhitelistId**: The list id for the operator whitelist.
 * @dev **permittedContractReceiversId: The list id for the contracts that are allowed to receive tokens.
 */
struct CollectionSecurityPolicy {
    TransferSecurityLevels transferSecurityLevel;
    uint120 operatorWhitelistId;
    uint120 permittedContractReceiversId;
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the security policy for a token collection in Creator Token Standards V2.
 * 
 * @dev **transferSecurityLevel**: The transfer security level set for the collection.
 * @dev **listId**: The list id that contains the blacklist and whitelist to apply to the collection.
 */
struct CollectionSecurityPolicyV2 {
    TransferSecurityLevels transferSecurityLevel;
    uint120 listId;
}

/** 
 * @dev Used internally in the Creator Token Base V2 contract to pack transfer validator configuration.
 * 
 * @dev **isInitialized**: If not initialized by the collection owner or admin the default validator will be used.
 * @dev **version**: The transfer validator version.
 * @dev **transferValidator**: The address of the transfer validator to use for applying collection security settings.
 */
struct TransferValidatorReference {
    bool isInitialized;
    uint16 version;
    address transferValidator;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

/**
 * @title TransferValidation
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice A mix-in that can be combined with ERC-721 contracts to provide more granular hooks.
 * Openzeppelin's ERC721 contract only provides hooks for before and after transfer.  This allows
 * developers to validate or customize transfers within the context of a mint, a burn, or a transfer.
 */
abstract contract TransferValidation is Context {
    
    /// @dev Thrown when the from and to address are both the zero address.
    error ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _beforeTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateBeforeTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _preValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _afterTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateAfterTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _postValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a mint
    function _preValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a mint
    function _postValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a burn
    function _preValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a burn
    function _postValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a transfer
    function _preValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a transfer
    function _postValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (access/Ownable.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {Context} from "../utils/Context.sol";

/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * The initial owner is set to the address provided by the deployer. This can
 * later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is Context {
    address private _owner;

    /**
     * @dev The caller account is not authorized to perform an operation.
     */
    error OwnableUnauthorizedAccount(address account);

    /**
     * @dev The owner is not a valid owner account. (eg. `address(0)`)
     */
    error OwnableInvalidOwner(address owner);

    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);

    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the address provided by the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    constructor(address initialOwner) {
        if (initialOwner == address(0)) {
            revert OwnableInvalidOwner(address(0));
        }
        _transferOwnership(initialOwner);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        if (owner() != _msgSender()) {
            revert OwnableUnauthorizedAccount(_msgSender());
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby disabling any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        if (newOwner == address(0)) {
            revert OwnableInvalidOwner(address(0));
        }
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (interfaces/IERC1271.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC1271 standard signature validation method for
 * contracts as defined in https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1271[ERC-1271].
 */
interface IERC1271 {
    /**
     * @dev Should return whether the signature provided is valid for the provided data
     * @param hash      Hash of the data to be signed
     * @param signature Signature byte array associated with _data
     */
    function isValidSignature(bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) external view returns (bytes4 magicValue);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (interfaces/IERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC165} from "../utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC165} from "../utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 */
interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(
        uint256 tokenId,
        uint256 salePrice
    ) external view returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC2981} from "../../interfaces/IERC2981.sol";
import {IERC165, ERC165} from "../../utils/introspection/ERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 */
abstract contract ERC2981 is IERC2981, ERC165 {
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }

    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 tokenId => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;

    /**
     * @dev The default royalty set is invalid (eg. (numerator / denominator) >= 1).
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyalty(uint256 numerator, uint256 denominator);

    /**
     * @dev The default royalty receiver is invalid.
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyaltyReceiver(address receiver);

    /**
     * @dev The royalty set for an specific `tokenId` is invalid (eg. (numerator / denominator) >= 1).
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId, uint256 numerator, uint256 denominator);

    /**
     * @dev The royalty receiver for `tokenId` is invalid.
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyaltyReceiver(uint256 tokenId, address receiver);

    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165, ERC165) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice) public view virtual returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];

        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }

        uint256 royaltyAmount = (salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();

        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }

    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        uint256 denominator = _feeDenominator();
        if (feeNumerator > denominator) {
            // Royalty fee will exceed the sale price
            revert ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyalty(feeNumerator, denominator);
        }
        if (receiver == address(0)) {
            revert ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyaltyReceiver(address(0));
        }

        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId, address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        uint256 denominator = _feeDenominator();
        if (feeNumerator > denominator) {
            // Royalty fee will exceed the sale price
            revert ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyalty(tokenId, feeNumerator, denominator);
        }
        if (receiver == address(0)) {
            revert ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyaltyReceiver(tokenId, address(0));
        }

        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/ERC20/extensions/IERC20Permit.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 *
 * ==== Security Considerations
 *
 * There are two important considerations concerning the use of `permit`. The first is that a valid permit signature
 * expresses an allowance, and it should not be assumed to convey additional meaning. In particular, it should not be
 * considered as an intention to spend the allowance in any specific way. The second is that because permits have
 * built-in replay protection and can be submitted by anyone, they can be frontrun. A protocol that uses permits should
 * take this into consideration and allow a `permit` call to fail. Combining these two aspects, a pattern that may be
 * generally recommended is:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function doThingWithPermit(..., uint256 value, uint256 deadline, uint8 v, bytes32 r, bytes32 s) public {
 *     try token.permit(msg.sender, address(this), value, deadline, v, r, s) {} catch {}
 *     doThing(..., value);
 * }
 *
 * function doThing(..., uint256 value) public {
 *     token.safeTransferFrom(msg.sender, address(this), value);
 *     ...
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Observe that: 1) `msg.sender` is used as the owner, leaving no ambiguity as to the signer intent, and 2) the use of
 * `try/catch` allows the permit to fail and makes the code tolerant to frontrunning. (See also
 * {SafeERC20-safeTransferFrom}).
 *
 * Additionally, note that smart contract wallets (such as Argent or Safe) are not able to produce permit signatures, so
 * contracts should have entry points that don't rely on permit.
 */
interface IERC20Permit {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     *
     * CAUTION: See Security Considerations above.
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20 {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the value of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the value of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Moves a `value` amount of tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Sets a `value` amount of tokens as the allowance of `spender` over the
     * caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 value) external returns (bool);

    /**
     * @dev Moves a `value` amount of tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `value` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC20} from "../IERC20.sol";
import {IERC20Permit} from "../extensions/IERC20Permit.sol";
import {Address} from "../../../utils/Address.sol";

/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20 {
    using Address for address;

    /**
     * @dev An operation with an ERC20 token failed.
     */
    error SafeERC20FailedOperation(address token);

    /**
     * @dev Indicates a failed `decreaseAllowance` request.
     */
    error SafeERC20FailedDecreaseAllowance(address spender, uint256 currentAllowance, uint256 requestedDecrease);

    /**
     * @dev Transfer `value` amount of `token` from the calling contract to `to`. If `token` returns no value,
     * non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeTransfer(IERC20 token, address to, uint256 value) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeCall(token.transfer, (to, value)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Transfer `value` amount of `token` from `from` to `to`, spending the approval given by `from` to the
     * calling contract. If `token` returns no value, non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(IERC20 token, address from, address to, uint256 value) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeCall(token.transferFrom, (from, to, value)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Increase the calling contract's allowance toward `spender` by `value`. If `token` returns no value,
     * non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
        uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
        forceApprove(token, spender, oldAllowance + value);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Decrease the calling contract's allowance toward `spender` by `requestedDecrease`. If `token` returns no
     * value, non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 requestedDecrease) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 currentAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            if (currentAllowance < requestedDecrease) {
                revert SafeERC20FailedDecreaseAllowance(spender, currentAllowance, requestedDecrease);
            }
            forceApprove(token, spender, currentAllowance - requestedDecrease);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Set the calling contract's allowance toward `spender` to `value`. If `token` returns no value,
     * non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful. Meant to be used with tokens that require the approval
     * to be set to zero before setting it to a non-zero value, such as USDT.
     */
    function forceApprove(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
        bytes memory approvalCall = abi.encodeCall(token.approve, (spender, value));

        if (!_callOptionalReturnBool(token, approvalCall)) {
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeCall(token.approve, (spender, 0)));
            _callOptionalReturn(token, approvalCall);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.

        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data);
        if (returndata.length != 0 && !abi.decode(returndata, (bool))) {
            revert SafeERC20FailedOperation(address(token));
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     *
     * This is a variant of {_callOptionalReturn} that silents catches all reverts and returns a bool instead.
     */
    function _callOptionalReturnBool(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private returns (bool) {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We cannot use {Address-functionCall} here since this should return false
        // and not revert is the subcall reverts.

        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = address(token).call(data);
        return success && (returndata.length == 0 || abi.decode(returndata, (bool))) && address(token).code.length > 0;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/Address.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library Address {
    /**
     * @dev The ETH balance of the account is not enough to perform the operation.
     */
    error AddressInsufficientBalance(address account);

    /**
     * @dev There's no code at `target` (it is not a contract).
     */
    error AddressEmptyCode(address target);

    /**
     * @dev A call to an address target failed. The target may have reverted.
     */
    error FailedInnerCall();

    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://consensys.net/diligence/blog/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.8.20/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        if (address(this).balance < amount) {
            revert AddressInsufficientBalance(address(this));
        }

        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        if (!success) {
            revert FailedInnerCall();
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason or custom error, it is bubbled
     * up by this function (like regular Solidity function calls). However, if
     * the call reverted with no returned reason, this function reverts with a
     * {FailedInnerCall} error.
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(address target, bytes memory data, uint256 value) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        if (address(this).balance < value) {
            revert AddressInsufficientBalance(address(this));
        }
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and reverts if the target
     * was not a contract or bubbling up the revert reason (falling back to {FailedInnerCall}) in case of an
     * unsuccessful call.
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (!success) {
            _revert(returndata);
        } else {
            // only check if target is a contract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
            // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
            if (returndata.length == 0 && target.code.length == 0) {
                revert AddressEmptyCode(target);
            }
            return returndata;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and reverts if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or with a default {FailedInnerCall} error.
     */
    function verifyCallResult(bool success, bytes memory returndata) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (!success) {
            _revert(returndata);
        } else {
            return returndata;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Reverts with returndata if present. Otherwise reverts with {FailedInnerCall}.
     */
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert FailedInnerCall();
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.1) (utils/Context.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }

    function _contextSuffixLength() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/ECDSA.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) operations.
 *
 * These functions can be used to verify that a message was signed by the holder
 * of the private keys of a given address.
 */
library ECDSA {
    enum RecoverError {
        NoError,
        InvalidSignature,
        InvalidSignatureLength,
        InvalidSignatureS
    }

    /**
     * @dev The signature derives the `address(0)`.
     */
    error ECDSAInvalidSignature();

    /**
     * @dev The signature has an invalid length.
     */
    error ECDSAInvalidSignatureLength(uint256 length);

    /**
     * @dev The signature has an S value that is in the upper half order.
     */
    error ECDSAInvalidSignatureS(bytes32 s);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address that signed a hashed message (`hash`) with `signature` or an error. This will not
     * return address(0) without also returning an error description. Errors are documented using an enum (error type)
     * and a bytes32 providing additional information about the error.
     *
     * If no error is returned, then the address can be used for verification purposes.
     *
     * The `ecrecover` EVM precompile allows for malleable (non-unique) signatures:
     * this function rejects them by requiring the `s` value to be in the lower
     * half order, and the `v` value to be either 27 or 28.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: `hash` _must_ be the result of a hash operation for the
     * verification to be secure: it is possible to craft signatures that
     * recover to arbitrary addresses for non-hashed data. A safe way to ensure
     * this is by receiving a hash of the original message (which may otherwise
     * be too long), and then calling {MessageHashUtils-toEthSignedMessageHash} on it.
     *
     * Documentation for signature generation:
     * - with https://web3js.readthedocs.io/en/v1.3.4/web3-eth-accounts.html#sign[Web3.js]
     * - with https://docs.ethers.io/v5/api/signer/#Signer-signMessage[ethers]
     */
    function tryRecover(bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) internal pure returns (address, RecoverError, bytes32) {
        if (signature.length == 65) {
            bytes32 r;
            bytes32 s;
            uint8 v;
            // ecrecover takes the signature parameters, and the only way to get them
            // currently is to use assembly.
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                r := mload(add(signature, 0x20))
                s := mload(add(signature, 0x40))
                v := byte(0, mload(add(signature, 0x60)))
            }
            return tryRecover(hash, v, r, s);
        } else {
            return (address(0), RecoverError.InvalidSignatureLength, bytes32(signature.length));
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address that signed a hashed message (`hash`) with
     * `signature`. This address can then be used for verification purposes.
     *
     * The `ecrecover` EVM precompile allows for malleable (non-unique) signatures:
     * this function rejects them by requiring the `s` value to be in the lower
     * half order, and the `v` value to be either 27 or 28.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: `hash` _must_ be the result of a hash operation for the
     * verification to be secure: it is possible to craft signatures that
     * recover to arbitrary addresses for non-hashed data. A safe way to ensure
     * this is by receiving a hash of the original message (which may otherwise
     * be too long), and then calling {MessageHashUtils-toEthSignedMessageHash} on it.
     */
    function recover(bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) internal pure returns (address) {
        (address recovered, RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) = tryRecover(hash, signature);
        _throwError(error, errorArg);
        return recovered;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-tryRecover} that receives the `r` and `vs` short-signature fields separately.
     *
     * See https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2098[EIP-2098 short signatures]
     */
    function tryRecover(bytes32 hash, bytes32 r, bytes32 vs) internal pure returns (address, RecoverError, bytes32) {
        unchecked {
            bytes32 s = vs & bytes32(0x7fffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff);
            // We do not check for an overflow here since the shift operation results in 0 or 1.
            uint8 v = uint8((uint256(vs) >> 255) + 27);
            return tryRecover(hash, v, r, s);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-recover} that receives the `r and `vs` short-signature fields separately.
     */
    function recover(bytes32 hash, bytes32 r, bytes32 vs) internal pure returns (address) {
        (address recovered, RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) = tryRecover(hash, r, vs);
        _throwError(error, errorArg);
        return recovered;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-tryRecover} that receives the `v`,
     * `r` and `s` signature fields separately.
     */
    function tryRecover(
        bytes32 hash,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal pure returns (address, RecoverError, bytes32) {
        // EIP-2 still allows signature malleability for ecrecover(). Remove this possibility and make the signature
        // unique. Appendix F in the Ethereum Yellow paper (https://ethereum.github.io/yellowpaper/paper.pdf), defines
        // the valid range for s in (301): 0 < s < secp256k1n ÷ 2 + 1, and for v in (302): v ∈ {27, 28}. Most
        // signatures from current libraries generate a unique signature with an s-value in the lower half order.
        //
        // If your library generates malleable signatures, such as s-values in the upper range, calculate a new s-value
        // with 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEBAAEDCE6AF48A03BBFD25E8CD0364141 - s1 and flip v from 27 to 28 or
        // vice versa. If your library also generates signatures with 0/1 for v instead 27/28, add 27 to v to accept
        // these malleable signatures as well.
        if (uint256(s) > 0x7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5D576E7357A4501DDFE92F46681B20A0) {
            return (address(0), RecoverError.InvalidSignatureS, s);
        }

        // If the signature is valid (and not malleable), return the signer address
        address signer = ecrecover(hash, v, r, s);
        if (signer == address(0)) {
            return (address(0), RecoverError.InvalidSignature, bytes32(0));
        }

        return (signer, RecoverError.NoError, bytes32(0));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-recover} that receives the `v`,
     * `r` and `s` signature fields separately.
     */
    function recover(bytes32 hash, uint8 v, bytes32 r, bytes32 s) internal pure returns (address) {
        (address recovered, RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) = tryRecover(hash, v, r, s);
        _throwError(error, errorArg);
        return recovered;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Optionally reverts with the corresponding custom error according to the `error` argument provided.
     */
    function _throwError(RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) private pure {
        if (error == RecoverError.NoError) {
            return; // no error: do nothing
        } else if (error == RecoverError.InvalidSignature) {
            revert ECDSAInvalidSignature();
        } else if (error == RecoverError.InvalidSignatureLength) {
            revert ECDSAInvalidSignatureLength(uint256(errorArg));
        } else if (error == RecoverError.InvalidSignatureS) {
            revert ECDSAInvalidSignatureS(errorArg);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the Merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates Merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     *@dev The multiproof provided is not valid.
     */
    error MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 root, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     */
    function verifyCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 root, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a Merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuilds the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the Merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 proofLen = proof.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        if (leavesLen + proofLen != totalHashes + 1) {
            revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
        }

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value from the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i]
                ? (leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++])
                : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            if (proofPos != proofLen) {
                revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
            }
            unchecked {
                return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
            }
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuilds the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the Merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 proofLen = proof.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        if (leavesLen + proofLen != totalHashes + 1) {
            revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
        }

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value from the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i]
                ? (leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++])
                : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            if (proofPos != proofLen) {
                revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
            }
            unchecked {
                return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
            }
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sorts the pair (a, b) and hashes the result.
     */
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Implementation of keccak256(abi.encode(a, b)) that doesn't allocate or expand memory.
     */
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/MessageHashUtils.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {Strings} from "../Strings.sol";

/**
 * @dev Signature message hash utilities for producing digests to be consumed by {ECDSA} recovery or signing.
 *
 * The library provides methods for generating a hash of a message that conforms to the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-191[EIP 191] and https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-712[EIP 712]
 * specifications.
 */
library MessageHashUtils {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-191 signed data with version
     * `0x45` (`personal_sign` messages).
     *
     * The digest is calculated by prefixing a bytes32 `messageHash` with
     * `"\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n32"` and hashing the result. It corresponds with the
     * hash signed when using the https://eth.wiki/json-rpc/API#eth_sign[`eth_sign`] JSON-RPC method.
     *
     * NOTE: The `messageHash` parameter is intended to be the result of hashing a raw message with
     * keccak256, although any bytes32 value can be safely used because the final digest will
     * be re-hashed.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toEthSignedMessageHash(bytes32 messageHash) internal pure returns (bytes32 digest) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, "\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n32") // 32 is the bytes-length of messageHash
            mstore(0x1c, messageHash) // 0x1c (28) is the length of the prefix
            digest := keccak256(0x00, 0x3c) // 0x3c is the length of the prefix (0x1c) + messageHash (0x20)
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-191 signed data with version
     * `0x45` (`personal_sign` messages).
     *
     * The digest is calculated by prefixing an arbitrary `message` with
     * `"\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n" + len(message)` and hashing the result. It corresponds with the
     * hash signed when using the https://eth.wiki/json-rpc/API#eth_sign[`eth_sign`] JSON-RPC method.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toEthSignedMessageHash(bytes memory message) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        return
            keccak256(bytes.concat("\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n", bytes(Strings.toString(message.length)), message));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-191 signed data with version
     * `0x00` (data with intended validator).
     *
     * The digest is calculated by prefixing an arbitrary `data` with `"\x19\x00"` and the intended
     * `validator` address. Then hashing the result.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toDataWithIntendedValidatorHash(address validator, bytes memory data) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        return keccak256(abi.encodePacked(hex"19_00", validator, data));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-712 typed data (EIP-191 version `0x01`).
     *
     * The digest is calculated from a `domainSeparator` and a `structHash`, by prefixing them with
     * `\x19\x01` and hashing the result. It corresponds to the hash signed by the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-712[`eth_signTypedData`] JSON-RPC method as part of EIP-712.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toTypedDataHash(bytes32 domainSeparator, bytes32 structHash) internal pure returns (bytes32 digest) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(ptr, hex"19_01")
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x02), domainSeparator)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x22), structHash)
            digest := keccak256(ptr, 0x42)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/SignatureChecker.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {ECDSA} from "./ECDSA.sol";
import {IERC1271} from "../../interfaces/IERC1271.sol";

/**
 * @dev Signature verification helper that can be used instead of `ECDSA.recover` to seamlessly support both ECDSA
 * signatures from externally owned accounts (EOAs) as well as ERC1271 signatures from smart contract wallets like
 * Argent and Safe Wallet (previously Gnosis Safe).
 */
library SignatureChecker {
    /**
     * @dev Checks if a signature is valid for a given signer and data hash. If the signer is a smart contract, the
     * signature is validated against that smart contract using ERC1271, otherwise it's validated using `ECDSA.recover`.
     *
     * NOTE: Unlike ECDSA signatures, contract signatures are revocable, and the outcome of this function can thus
     * change through time. It could return true at block N and false at block N+1 (or the opposite).
     */
    function isValidSignatureNow(address signer, bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) internal view returns (bool) {
        (address recovered, ECDSA.RecoverError error, ) = ECDSA.tryRecover(hash, signature);
        return
            (error == ECDSA.RecoverError.NoError && recovered == signer) ||
            isValidERC1271SignatureNow(signer, hash, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Checks if a signature is valid for a given signer and data hash. The signature is validated
     * against the signer smart contract using ERC1271.
     *
     * NOTE: Unlike ECDSA signatures, contract signatures are revocable, and the outcome of this function can thus
     * change through time. It could return true at block N and false at block N+1 (or the opposite).
     */
    function isValidERC1271SignatureNow(
        address signer,
        bytes32 hash,
        bytes memory signature
    ) internal view returns (bool) {
        (bool success, bytes memory result) = signer.staticcall(
            abi.encodeCall(IERC1271.isValidSignature, (hash, signature))
        );
        return (success &&
            result.length >= 32 &&
            abi.decode(result, (bytes32)) == bytes32(IERC1271.isValidSignature.selector));
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC165} from "./IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 */
abstract contract ERC165 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165).interfaceId;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library Math {
    /**
     * @dev Muldiv operation overflow.
     */
    error MathOverflowedMulDiv();

    enum Rounding {
        Floor, // Toward negative infinity
        Ceil, // Toward positive infinity
        Trunc, // Toward zero
        Expand // Away from zero
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the addition of two unsigned integers, with an overflow flag.
     */
    function tryAdd(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 c = a + b;
            if (c < a) return (false, 0);
            return (true, c);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the subtraction of two unsigned integers, with an overflow flag.
     */
    function trySub(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            if (b > a) return (false, 0);
            return (true, a - b);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the multiplication of two unsigned integers, with an overflow flag.
     */
    function tryMul(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            // Gas optimization: this is cheaper than requiring 'a' not being zero, but the
            // benefit is lost if 'b' is also tested.
            // See: https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/openzeppelin-contracts/pull/522
            if (a == 0) return (true, 0);
            uint256 c = a * b;
            if (c / a != b) return (false, 0);
            return (true, c);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the division of two unsigned integers, with a division by zero flag.
     */
    function tryDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            if (b == 0) return (false, 0);
            return (true, a / b);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the remainder of dividing two unsigned integers, with a division by zero flag.
     */
    function tryMod(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            if (b == 0) return (false, 0);
            return (true, a % b);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
     */
    function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
     * zero.
     */
    function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
        return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
     *
     * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds towards infinity instead
     * of rounding towards zero.
     */
    function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (b == 0) {
            // Guarantee the same behavior as in a regular Solidity division.
            return a / b;
        }

        // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
        return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or
     * denominator == 0.
     * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv) with further edits by
     * Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
     */
    function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
        unchecked {
            // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
            // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
            // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
            uint256 prod0 = x * y; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
            uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
            assembly {
                let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
            }

            // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
            if (prod1 == 0) {
                // Solidity will revert if denominator == 0, unlike the div opcode on its own.
                // The surrounding unchecked block does not change this fact.
                // See https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/latest/control-structures.html#checked-or-unchecked-arithmetic.
                return prod0 / denominator;
            }

            // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
            if (denominator <= prod1) {
                revert MathOverflowedMulDiv();
            }

            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // 512 by 256 division.
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////

            // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
            uint256 remainder;
            assembly {
                // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)

                // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
            }

            // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator.
            // Always >= 1. See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.

            uint256 twos = denominator & (0 - denominator);
            assembly {
                // Divide denominator by twos.
                denominator := div(denominator, twos)

                // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                prod0 := div(prod0, twos)

                // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
            }

            // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
            prod0 |= prod1 * twos;

            // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
            // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
            // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
            uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;

            // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also
            // works in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256

            // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
            // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
            // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
            // is no longer required.
            result = prod0 * inverse;
            return result;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
        if (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
            result += 1;
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded
     * towards zero.
     *
     * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }

        // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
        //
        // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
        // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
        //
        // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
        // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
        // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
        //
        // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
        uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);

        // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
        // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
        // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
        // into the expected uint128 result.
        unchecked {
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            return min(result, a / result);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = sqrt(a);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2 of a positive value rounded towards zero.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 128;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                value >>= 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                value >>= 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                value >>= 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log2(value);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10 of a positive value rounded towards zero.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >= 10 ** 64) {
                value /= 10 ** 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 32) {
                value /= 10 ** 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 16) {
                value /= 10 ** 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 8) {
                value /= 10 ** 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 4) {
                value /= 10 ** 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 2) {
                value /= 10 ** 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 1) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log10(value);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && 10 ** result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256 of a positive value rounded towards zero.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     *
     * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log256(value);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && 1 << (result << 3) < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether a provided rounding mode is considered rounding up for unsigned integers.
     */
    function unsignedRoundsUp(Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return uint8(rounding) % 2 == 1;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/math/SignedMath.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Standard signed math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library SignedMath {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two signed numbers.
     */
    function max(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two signed numbers.
     */
    function min(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two signed numbers without overflow.
     * The result is rounded towards zero.
     */
    function average(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
        // Formula from the book "Hacker's Delight"
        int256 x = (a & b) + ((a ^ b) >> 1);
        return x + (int256(uint256(x) >> 255) & (a ^ b));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the absolute unsigned value of a signed value.
     */
    function abs(int256 n) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            // must be unchecked in order to support `n = type(int256).min`
            return uint256(n >= 0 ? n : -n);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/ReentrancyGuard.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Contract module that helps prevent reentrant calls to a function.
 *
 * Inheriting from `ReentrancyGuard` will make the {nonReentrant} modifier
 * available, which can be applied to functions to make sure there are no nested
 * (reentrant) calls to them.
 *
 * Note that because there is a single `nonReentrant` guard, functions marked as
 * `nonReentrant` may not call one another. This can be worked around by making
 * those functions `private`, and then adding `external` `nonReentrant` entry
 * points to them.
 *
 * TIP: If you would like to learn more about reentrancy and alternative ways
 * to protect against it, check out our blog post
 * https://blog.openzeppelin.com/reentrancy-after-istanbul/[Reentrancy After Istanbul].
 */
abstract contract ReentrancyGuard {
    // Booleans are more expensive than uint256 or any type that takes up a full
    // word because each write operation emits an extra SLOAD to first read the
    // slot's contents, replace the bits taken up by the boolean, and then write
    // back. This is the compiler's defense against contract upgrades and
    // pointer aliasing, and it cannot be disabled.

    // The values being non-zero value makes deployment a bit more expensive,
    // but in exchange the refund on every call to nonReentrant will be lower in
    // amount. Since refunds are capped to a percentage of the total
    // transaction's gas, it is best to keep them low in cases like this one, to
    // increase the likelihood of the full refund coming into effect.
    uint256 private constant NOT_ENTERED = 1;
    uint256 private constant ENTERED = 2;

    uint256 private _status;

    /**
     * @dev Unauthorized reentrant call.
     */
    error ReentrancyGuardReentrantCall();

    constructor() {
        _status = NOT_ENTERED;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Prevents a contract from calling itself, directly or indirectly.
     * Calling a `nonReentrant` function from another `nonReentrant`
     * function is not supported. It is possible to prevent this from happening
     * by making the `nonReentrant` function external, and making it call a
     * `private` function that does the actual work.
     */
    modifier nonReentrant() {
        _nonReentrantBefore();
        _;
        _nonReentrantAfter();
    }

    function _nonReentrantBefore() private {
        // On the first call to nonReentrant, _status will be NOT_ENTERED
        if (_status == ENTERED) {
            revert ReentrancyGuardReentrantCall();
        }

        // Any calls to nonReentrant after this point will fail
        _status = ENTERED;
    }

    function _nonReentrantAfter() private {
        // By storing the original value once again, a refund is triggered (see
        // https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2200)
        _status = NOT_ENTERED;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the reentrancy guard is currently set to "entered", which indicates there is a
     * `nonReentrant` function in the call stack.
     */
    function _reentrancyGuardEntered() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _status == ENTERED;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/Strings.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {Math} from "./math/Math.sol";
import {SignedMath} from "./math/SignedMath.sol";

/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library Strings {
    bytes16 private constant HEX_DIGITS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;

    /**
     * @dev The `value` string doesn't fit in the specified `length`.
     */
    error StringsInsufficientHexLength(uint256 value, uint256 length);

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 length = Math.log10(value) + 1;
            string memory buffer = new string(length);
            uint256 ptr;
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
            }
            while (true) {
                ptr--;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), HEX_DIGITS))
                }
                value /= 10;
                if (value == 0) break;
            }
            return buffer;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `int256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toStringSigned(int256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return string.concat(value < 0 ? "-" : "", toString(SignedMath.abs(value)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            return toHexString(value, Math.log256(value) + 1);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        uint256 localValue = value;
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = HEX_DIGITS[localValue & 0xf];
            localValue >>= 4;
        }
        if (localValue != 0) {
            revert StringsInsufficientHexLength(value, length);
        }
        return string(buffer);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal
     * representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the two strings are equal.
     */
    function equal(string memory a, string memory b) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return bytes(a).length == bytes(b).length && keccak256(bytes(a)) == keccak256(bytes(b));
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/access/OwnablePermissions.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/interfaces/ICreatorToken.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/interfaces/ICreatorTokenTransferValidator.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/utils/TransferValidation.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/interfaces/IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @title CreatorTokenBase
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice CreatorTokenBase is an abstract contract that provides basic functionality for managing token
 * transfer policies through an implementation of ICreatorTokenTransferValidator. This contract is intended to be used
 * as a base for creator-specific token contracts, enabling customizable transfer restrictions and security policies.
 *
 * <h4>Features:</h4>
 * <ul>Ownable: This contract can have an owner who can set and update the transfer validator.</ul>
 * <ul>TransferValidation: Implements the basic token transfer validation interface.</ul>
 * <ul>ICreatorToken: Implements the interface for creator tokens, providing view functions for token security policies.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Benefits:</h4>
 * <ul>Provides a flexible and modular way to implement custom token transfer restrictions and security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Allows creators to enforce policies such as whitelisted operators and permitted contract receivers.</ul>
 * <ul>Can be easily integrated into other token contracts as a base contract.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Intended Usage:</h4>
 * <ul>Use as a base contract for creator token implementations that require advanced transfer restrictions and
 *   security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Set and update the ICreatorTokenTransferValidator implementation contract to enforce desired policies for the
 *   creator token.</ul>
 */
abstract contract CreatorTokenBase is
    OwnablePermissions,
    TransferValidation,
    ICreatorToken
{
    /**
     * @dev Thrown when the transfer validator address is the zero address
     * @dev or it does not implement the `ICreatorTokenTransferValidator` interface.
     */
    error CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();

    /// @dev Thrown when attempting to set transfer security settings before a transfer validator is set.
    error CreatorTokenBase__SetTransferValidatorFirst();

    /// @dev The default transfer validator address for calls to `setToDefaultSecurityPolicy`.
    address public constant DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR =
        address(0x721C00182a990771244d7A71B9FA2ea789A3b433);

    /// @dev The default transfer security level for calls to `setToDefaultSecurityPolicy`.
    TransferSecurityLevels public constant DEFAULT_TRANSFER_SECURITY_LEVEL =
        TransferSecurityLevels.Two;

    /// @dev The default operator whitelist id for calls to `setToDefaultSecurityPolicy`.
    uint120 public constant DEFAULT_OPERATOR_WHITELIST_ID = uint120(1);

    ICreatorTokenTransferValidator private transferValidator;

    /**
     * @notice Allows the contract owner to set the transfer validator to the official validator contract
     *         and set the security policy to the recommended default settings.
     * @dev    May be overridden to change the default behavior of an individual collection.
     */
    function setToDefaultSecurityPolicy() public virtual {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();
        setTransferValidator(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR);
        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR)
            .setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(
                address(this),
                DEFAULT_TRANSFER_SECURITY_LEVEL
            );
        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR)
            .setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(
                address(this),
                DEFAULT_OPERATOR_WHITELIST_ID
            );
    }

    /**
     * @notice Allows the contract owner to set the transfer validator to a custom validator contract
     *         and set the security policy to their own custom settings.
     */
    function setToCustomValidatorAndSecurityPolicy(
        address validator,
        TransferSecurityLevels level,
        uint120 operatorWhitelistId,
        uint120 permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
    ) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        setTransferValidator(validator);

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(validator)
            .setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(address(this), level);

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(validator)
            .setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(
                address(this),
                operatorWhitelistId
            );

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(validator)
            .setPermittedContractReceiverAllowlistOfCollection(
                address(this),
                permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
            );
    }

    /**
     * @notice Allows the contract owner to set the security policy to their own custom settings.
     * @dev    Reverts if the transfer validator has not been set.
     */
    function setToCustomSecurityPolicy(
        TransferSecurityLevels level,
        uint120 operatorWhitelistId,
        uint120 permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
    ) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator validator = getTransferValidator();
        if (address(validator) == address(0)) {
            revert CreatorTokenBase__SetTransferValidatorFirst();
        }

        validator.setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(address(this), level);
        validator.setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(
            address(this),
            operatorWhitelistId
        );
        validator.setPermittedContractReceiverAllowlistOfCollection(
            address(this),
            permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
        );
    }

    /**
     * @notice Sets the transfer validator for the token contract.
     *
     * @dev    Throws when provided validator contract is not the zero address and doesn't support
     *         the ICreatorTokenTransferValidator interface.
     * @dev    Throws when the caller is not the contract owner.
     *
     * @dev    <h4>Postconditions:</h4>
     *         1. The transferValidator address is updated.
     *         2. The `TransferValidatorUpdated` event is emitted.
     *
     * @param transferValidator_ The address of the transfer validator contract.
     */
    function setTransferValidator(address transferValidator_) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        bool isValidTransferValidator = false;

        if (transferValidator_.code.length > 0) {
            try
                IERC165(transferValidator_).supportsInterface(
                    type(ICreatorTokenTransferValidator).interfaceId
                )
            returns (bool supportsInterface) {
                isValidTransferValidator = supportsInterface;
            } catch {}
        }

        if (transferValidator_ != address(0) && !isValidTransferValidator) {
            revert CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();
        }

        emit TransferValidatorUpdated(
            address(transferValidator),
            transferValidator_
        );

        transferValidator = ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(transferValidator_);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the transfer validator contract address for this token contract.
     */
    function getTransferValidator()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (ICreatorTokenTransferValidator)
    {
        return transferValidator;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the security policy for this token contract, which includes:
     *         Transfer security level, operator whitelist id, permitted contract receiver allowlist id.
     */
    function getSecurityPolicy()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (CollectionSecurityPolicy memory)
    {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return transferValidator.getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this));
        }

        return
            CollectionSecurityPolicy({
                transferSecurityLevel: TransferSecurityLevels.Recommended,
                operatorWhitelistId: 0,
                permittedContractReceiversId: 0
            });
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the list of all whitelisted operators for this token contract.
     * @dev    This can be an expensive call and should only be used in view-only functions.
     */
    function getWhitelistedOperators()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (address[] memory)
    {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.getWhitelistedOperators(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .operatorWhitelistId
                );
        }

        return new address[](0);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the list of permitted contract receivers for this token contract.
     * @dev    This can be an expensive call and should only be used in view-only functions.
     */
    function getPermittedContractReceivers()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (address[] memory)
    {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.getPermittedContractReceivers(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .permittedContractReceiversId
                );
        }

        return new address[](0);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Checks if an operator is whitelisted for this token contract.
     * @param operator The address of the operator to check.
     */
    function isOperatorWhitelisted(
        address operator
    ) public view override returns (bool) {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.isOperatorWhitelisted(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .operatorWhitelistId,
                    operator
                );
        }

        return false;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Checks if a contract receiver is permitted for this token contract.
     * @param receiver The address of the receiver to check.
     */
    function isContractReceiverPermitted(
        address receiver
    ) public view override returns (bool) {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.isContractReceiverPermitted(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .permittedContractReceiversId,
                    receiver
                );
        }

        return false;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Determines if a transfer is allowed based on the token contract's security policy.  Use this function
     *         to simulate whether or not a transfer made by the specified `caller` from the `from` address to the `to`
     *         address would be allowed by this token's security policy.
     *
     * @notice This function only checks the security policy restrictions and does not check whether token ownership
     *         or approvals are in place.
     *
     * @param caller The address of the simulated caller.
     * @param from   The address of the sender.
     * @param to     The address of the receiver.
     * @return       True if the transfer is allowed, false otherwise.
     */
    function isTransferAllowed(
        address caller,
        address from,
        address to
    ) public view override returns (bool) {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            try
                transferValidator.applyCollectionTransferPolicy(
                    caller,
                    from,
                    to
                )
            {
                return true;
            } catch {
                return false;
            }
        }
        return true;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Pre-validates a token transfer, reverting if the transfer is not allowed by this token's security policy.
     *      Inheriting contracts are responsible for overriding the _beforeTokenTransfer function, or its equivalent
     *      and calling _validateBeforeTransfer so that checks can be properly applied during token transfers.
     *
     * @dev Throws when the transfer doesn't comply with the collection's transfer policy, if the transferValidator is
     *      set to a non-zero address.
     *
     * @param caller  The address of the caller.
     * @param from    The address of the sender.
     * @param to      The address of the receiver.
     */
    function _preValidateTransfer(
        address caller,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 /*tokenId*/,
        uint256 /*value*/
    ) internal virtual override {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            transferValidator.applyCollectionTransferPolicy(caller, from, to);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "./CreatorTokenBase.sol";
import "erc721a/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryable.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721ACQueryable
 */
abstract contract ERC721ACQueryable is ERC721AQueryable, CreatorTokenBase {
    constructor(
        string memory name_,
        string memory symbol_
    ) CreatorTokenBase() ERC721A(name_, symbol_) {}

    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    ) public view virtual override(ERC721A, IERC721A) returns (bool) {
        return
            interfaceId == type(ICreatorToken).interfaceId ||
            ERC721A.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _beforeTokenTransfers hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual override {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity; ) {
            _validateBeforeTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _afterTokenTransfer hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual override {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity; ) {
            _validateAfterTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    function _msgSenderERC721A()
        internal
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (address)
    {
        return _msgSender();
    }
}

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/token/common/ERC2981.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/ReentrancyGuard.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/ECDSA.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/SignatureChecker.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MessageHashUtils.sol";
import "./creator-token-standards/ERC721ACQueryable.sol";
import "./utils/Constants.sol";
import "../magicdrop-types/contracts/IERC721M.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721CM
 *
 * @dev ERC721ACQueryable and ERC721C subclass with MagicEden launchpad features including
 *  - multiple minting stages with time-based auto stage switch
 *  - global and stage wallet-level minting limit
 *  - whitelist using merkle tree
 *  - crossmint support
 *  - anti-botting
 */
contract ERC721CM is IERC721M, ERC721ACQueryable, Ownable, ReentrancyGuard {
    using ECDSA for bytes32;
    using SafeERC20 for IERC20;

    // Whether this contract is mintable.
    bool private _mintable;

    // Specify how long a signature from cosigner is valid for, recommend 300 seconds.
    uint64 private _timestampExpirySeconds;

    // The address of the cosigner server.
    address private _cosigner;

    // The crossmint address. Need to set if using crossmint.
    address private _crossmintAddress;

    // The total mintable supply.
    uint256 internal _maxMintableSupply;

    // Global wallet limit, across all stages.
    uint256 private _globalWalletLimit;

    // Current base URI.
    string private _currentBaseURI;

    // The suffix for the token URL, e.g. ".json".
    string private _tokenURISuffix;

    // The uri for the storefront-level metadata for better indexing. e.g. "ipfs://UyNGgv3jx2HHfBjQX9RnKtxj2xv2xQDtbVXoRi5rJ31234"
    string private _contractURI;

    // Mint stage infomation. See MintStageInfo for details.
    MintStageInfo[] private _mintStages;

    // Minted count per stage per wallet.
    mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint32))
        private _stageMintedCountsPerWallet;

    // Minted count per stage.
    mapping(uint256 => uint256) private _stageMintedCounts;

    // Address of ERC-20 token used to pay for minting. If 0 address, use native currency.
    address private _mintCurrency;

    // Total mint fee
    uint256 private _totalMintFee;

    // Fund receiver
    address public immutable FUND_RECEIVER;

    // Authorized minters
    mapping(address => bool) private _authorizedMinters;

    constructor(
        string memory collectionName,
        string memory collectionSymbol,
        string memory tokenURISuffix,
        uint256 maxMintableSupply,
        uint256 globalWalletLimit,
        address cosigner,
        uint64 timestampExpirySeconds,
        address mintCurrency,
        address fundReceiver
    ) Ownable(msg.sender) ERC721ACQueryable(collectionName, collectionSymbol) {
        if (globalWalletLimit > maxMintableSupply)
            revert GlobalWalletLimitOverflow();
        _mintable = true;
        _maxMintableSupply = maxMintableSupply;
        _globalWalletLimit = globalWalletLimit;
        _tokenURISuffix = tokenURISuffix;
        _cosigner = cosigner; // ethers.constants.AddressZero for no cosigning
        _timestampExpirySeconds = timestampExpirySeconds;
        _mintCurrency = mintCurrency;
        FUND_RECEIVER = fundReceiver;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether mintable.
     */
    modifier canMint() {
        if (!_mintable) revert NotMintable();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether it has enough supply for the given qty.
     */
    modifier hasSupply(uint256 qty) {
        if (totalSupply() + qty > _maxMintableSupply) revert NoSupplyLeft();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether the msg sender is authorized to mint.
     */
    modifier onlyAuthorizedMinter() {
        if (_authorizedMinters[_msgSender()] != true) revert NotAuthorized();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns cosign nonce.
     */
    function getCosignNonce(
        address minter
    ) public view override returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(minter);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets cosigner.
     */
    function setCosigner(address cosigner) external onlyOwner {
        _cosigner = cosigner;
        emit SetCosigner(cosigner);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets expiry in seconds. This timestamp specifies how long a signature from cosigner is valid for.
     */
    function setTimestampExpirySeconds(uint64 expiry) external onlyOwner {
        _timestampExpirySeconds = expiry;
        emit SetTimestampExpirySeconds(expiry);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets crossmint address if using crossmint. This allows the specified address to call `crossmint`.
     */
    function setCrossmintAddress(address crossmintAddress) external onlyOwner {
        _crossmintAddress = crossmintAddress;
        emit SetCrossmintAddress(crossmintAddress);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Add authorized minter. Can only be called by contract owner.
     */
    function addAuthorizedMinter(address minter) external onlyOwner {
        _authorizedMinters[minter] = true;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Remove authorized minter. Can only be called by contract owner.
     */
    function removeAuthorizedMinter(address minter) external onlyOwner {
        _authorizedMinters[minter] = false;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets stages in the format of an array of `MintStageInfo`.
     *
     * Following is an example of launch with two stages. The first stage is exclusive for whitelisted wallets
     * specified by merkle root.
     *    [{
     *      price: 10000000000000000000,
     *      maxStageSupply: 2000,
     *      walletLimit: 1,
     *      merkleRoot: 0x559fadeb887449800b7b320bf1e92d309f329b9641ac238bebdb74e15c0a5218,
     *      startTimeUnixSeconds: 1667768000,
     *      endTimeUnixSeconds: 1667771600,
     *     },
     *     {
     *      price: 20000000000000000000,
     *      maxStageSupply: 3000,
     *      walletLimit: 2,
     *      merkleRoot: 0,
     *      startTimeUnixSeconds: 1667771600,
     *      endTimeUnixSeconds: 1667775200,
     *     }
     * ]
     */
    function setStages(MintStageInfo[] calldata newStages) external onlyOwner {
        delete _mintStages;

        for (uint256 i = 0; i < newStages.length; ) {
            if (i >= 1) {
                if (
                    newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds <
                    newStages[i - 1].endTimeUnixSeconds +
                        _timestampExpirySeconds
                ) {
                    revert InsufficientStageTimeGap();
                }
            }
            _assertValidStartAndEndTimestamp(
                newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds,
                newStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
            );
            _mintStages.push(
                MintStageInfo({
                    price: newStages[i].price,
                    mintFee: newStages[i].mintFee,
                    walletLimit: newStages[i].walletLimit,
                    merkleRoot: newStages[i].merkleRoot,
                    maxStageSupply: newStages[i].maxStageSupply,
                    startTimeUnixSeconds: newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds,
                    endTimeUnixSeconds: newStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
                })
            );
            emit UpdateStage(
                i,
                newStages[i].price,
                newStages[i].mintFee,
                newStages[i].walletLimit,
                newStages[i].merkleRoot,
                newStages[i].maxStageSupply,
                newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds,
                newStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
            );

            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gets whether mintable.
     */
    function getMintable() external view returns (bool) {
        return _mintable;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets mintable.
     */
    function setMintable(bool mintable) external onlyOwner {
        _mintable = mintable;
        emit SetMintable(mintable);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns number of stages.
     */
    function getNumberStages() external view override returns (uint256) {
        return _mintStages.length;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns maximum mintable supply.
     */
    function getMaxMintableSupply() external view override returns (uint256) {
        return _maxMintableSupply;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets maximum mintable supply.
     *
     * New supply cannot be larger than the old.
     */
    function setMaxMintableSupply(
        uint256 maxMintableSupply
    ) external virtual onlyOwner {
        if (maxMintableSupply > _maxMintableSupply) {
            revert CannotIncreaseMaxMintableSupply();
        }
        _maxMintableSupply = maxMintableSupply;
        emit SetMaxMintableSupply(maxMintableSupply);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns global wallet limit. This is the max number of tokens can be minted by one wallet.
     */
    function getGlobalWalletLimit() external view override returns (uint256) {
        return _globalWalletLimit;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets global wallet limit.
     */
    function setGlobalWalletLimit(
        uint256 globalWalletLimit
    ) external onlyOwner {
        if (globalWalletLimit > _maxMintableSupply)
            revert GlobalWalletLimitOverflow();
        _globalWalletLimit = globalWalletLimit;
        emit SetGlobalWalletLimit(globalWalletLimit);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns number of minted token for a given address.
     */
    function totalMintedByAddress(
        address a
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(a);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns info for one stage specified by index (starting from 0).
     */
    function getStageInfo(
        uint256 index
    ) external view override returns (MintStageInfo memory, uint32, uint256) {
        if (index >= _mintStages.length) {
            revert("InvalidStage");
        }
        uint32 walletMinted = _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[index][msg.sender];
        uint256 stageMinted = _stageMintedCounts[index];
        return (_mintStages[index], walletMinted, stageMinted);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns mint currency address.
     */
    function getMintCurrency() external view returns (address) {
        return _mintCurrency;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s).
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function mint(
        uint32 qty,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable virtual nonReentrant {
        _mintInternal(qty, msg.sender, 0, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s) with limit.
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * limit - limit for the given minter
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function mintWithLimit(
        uint32 qty,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable virtual nonReentrant {
        _mintInternal(qty, msg.sender, limit, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s) through crossmint. This function is supposed to be called by crossmint.
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * to - the address to mint tokens to
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function crossmint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable nonReentrant {
        if (_crossmintAddress == address(0)) revert CrossmintAddressNotSet();

        // Check the caller is Crossmint
        if (msg.sender != _crossmintAddress) revert CrossmintOnly();

        _mintInternal(qty, to, 0, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Authorized mints token(s) with limit
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * to - the address to mint tokens to
     * limit - limit for the given minter
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function authorizedMint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable onlyAuthorizedMinter {
        _mintInternal(qty, to, limit, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Implementation of minting.
     */
    function _mintInternal(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) internal canMint hasSupply(qty) {
        uint64 stageTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
        bool waiveMintFee = false;

        if (_cosigner != address(0)) {
            waiveMintFee = assertValidCosign(
                msg.sender,
                qty,
                timestamp,
                signature
            );
            _assertValidTimestamp(timestamp);
            stageTimestamp = timestamp;
        }

        uint256 activeStage = getActiveStageFromTimestamp(stageTimestamp);
        MintStageInfo memory stage = _mintStages[activeStage];

        uint80 adjustedMintFee = waiveMintFee ? 0 : stage.mintFee;

        // Check value if minting with ETH
        if (
            _mintCurrency == address(0) &&
            msg.value < (stage.price + adjustedMintFee) * qty
        ) revert NotEnoughValue();

        // Check stage supply if applicable
        if (stage.maxStageSupply > 0) {
            if (_stageMintedCounts[activeStage] + qty > stage.maxStageSupply)
                revert StageSupplyExceeded();
        }

        // Check global wallet limit if applicable
        if (_globalWalletLimit > 0) {
            if (_numberMinted(to) + qty > _globalWalletLimit)
                revert WalletGlobalLimitExceeded();
        }

        // Check wallet limit for stage if applicable, limit == 0 means no limit enforced
        if (stage.walletLimit > 0) {
            if (
                _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[activeStage][to] + qty >
                stage.walletLimit
            ) revert WalletStageLimitExceeded();
        }

        // Check merkle proof if applicable, merkleRoot == 0x00...00 means no proof required
        if (stage.merkleRoot != 0) {
            if (
                MerkleProof.processProof(
                    proof,
                    keccak256(abi.encodePacked(to, limit))
                ) != stage.merkleRoot
            ) revert InvalidProof();

            // Verify merkle proof mint limit
            if (
                limit > 0 &&
                _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[activeStage][to] + qty > limit
            ) {
                revert WalletStageLimitExceeded();
            }
        }

        if (_mintCurrency != address(0)) {
            IERC20(_mintCurrency).safeTransferFrom(
                msg.sender,
                address(this),
                (stage.price + adjustedMintFee) * qty
            );
        }

        _totalMintFee += adjustedMintFee * qty;

        _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[activeStage][to] += qty;
        _stageMintedCounts[activeStage] += qty;
        _safeMint(to, qty);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s) by owner.
     *
     * NOTE: This function bypasses validations thus only available for owner.
     * This is typically used for owner to  pre-mint or mint the remaining of the supply.
     */
    function ownerMint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to
    ) external onlyOwner hasSupply(qty) {
        _safeMint(to, qty);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Withdraws funds by owner.
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        (bool success, ) = MINT_FEE_RECEIVER.call{value: _totalMintFee}("");
        if (!success) revert TransferFailed();
        _totalMintFee = 0;

        uint256 remainingValue = address(this).balance;
        (success, ) = FUND_RECEIVER.call{value: remainingValue}("");
        if (!success) revert WithdrawFailed();

        emit Withdraw(_totalMintFee + remainingValue);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Withdraws ERC-20 funds by owner.
     */
    function withdrawERC20() external onlyOwner {
        if (_mintCurrency == address(0)) revert WrongMintCurrency();

        IERC20(_mintCurrency).safeTransfer(MINT_FEE_RECEIVER, _totalMintFee);
        _totalMintFee = 0;

        uint256 remaining = IERC20(_mintCurrency).balanceOf(address(this));
        IERC20(_mintCurrency).safeTransfer(FUND_RECEIVER, remaining);

        emit WithdrawERC20(_mintCurrency, _totalMintFee + remaining);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets token base URI.
     */
    function setBaseURI(string calldata baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _currentBaseURI = baseURI;
        emit SetBaseURI(baseURI);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets token URI suffix. e.g. ".json".
     */
    function setTokenURISuffix(string calldata suffix) external onlyOwner {
        _tokenURISuffix = suffix;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns token URI for a given token id.
     */
    function tokenURI(
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public view override(ERC721A, IERC721A) returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

        string memory baseURI = _currentBaseURI;
        return
            bytes(baseURI).length != 0
                ? string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        baseURI,
                        _toString(tokenId),
                        _tokenURISuffix
                    )
                )
                : "";
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns URI for the collection-level metadata.
     */
    function contractURI() public view returns (string memory) {
        return _contractURI;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Set the URI for the collection-level metadata.
     */
    function setContractURI(string calldata uri) external onlyOwner {
        _contractURI = uri;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns data hash for the given minter, qty, waiveMintFee and timestamp.
     */
    function getCosignDigest(
        address minter,
        uint32 qty,
        bool waiveMintFee,
        uint64 timestamp
    ) public view returns (bytes32) {
        if (_cosigner == address(0)) revert CosignerNotSet();
        return
            MessageHashUtils.toEthSignedMessageHash(
                keccak256(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        address(this),
                        minter,
                        qty,
                        waiveMintFee,
                        _cosigner,
                        timestamp,
                        _chainID(),
                        getCosignNonce(minter)
                    )
                )
            );
    }

    /**
     * @dev Validates the the given signature. Returns whether mint fee is waived.
     */
    function assertValidCosign(
        address minter,
        uint32 qty,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes memory signature
    ) public view returns (bool) {
        if (
            SignatureChecker.isValidSignatureNow(
                _cosigner,
                getCosignDigest(
                    minter,
                    qty,
                    /* waiveMintFee= */ true,
                    timestamp
                ),
                signature
            )
        ) {
            return true;
        }

        if (
            SignatureChecker.isValidSignatureNow(
                _cosigner,
                getCosignDigest(
                    minter,
                    qty,
                    /* waiveMintFee= */ false,
                    timestamp
                ),
                signature
            )
        ) {
            return false;
        }

        revert InvalidCosignSignature();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the current active stage based on timestamp.
     */
    function getActiveStageFromTimestamp(
        uint64 timestamp
    ) public view returns (uint256) {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < _mintStages.length; ) {
            if (
                timestamp >= _mintStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds &&
                timestamp < _mintStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
            ) {
                return i;
            }
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        revert InvalidStage();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Validates the timestamp is not expired.
     */
    function _assertValidTimestamp(uint64 timestamp) internal view {
        if (timestamp < block.timestamp - _timestampExpirySeconds)
            revert TimestampExpired();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Validates the start timestamp is before end timestamp. Used when updating stages.
     */
    function _assertValidStartAndEndTimestamp(
        uint64 start,
        uint64 end
    ) internal pure {
        if (start >= end) revert InvalidStartAndEndTimestamp();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns chain id.
     */
    function _chainID() private view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 chainID;
        assembly {
            chainID := chainid()
        }
        return chainID;
    }

    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual override {
        _checkOwner();
    }
}

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import {ERC2981, UpdatableRoyalties} from "./royalties/UpdatableRoyalties.sol";
import {ERC721CM, ERC721ACQueryable, IERC721A} from "./ERC721CM.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721CMRoyalties
 */
contract ERC721CMRoyalties is ERC721CM, UpdatableRoyalties {
    constructor(
        string memory collectionName,
        string memory collectionSymbol,
        string memory tokenURISuffix,
        uint256 maxMintableSupply,
        uint256 globalWalletLimit,
        address cosigner,
        uint64 timestampExpirySeconds,
        address mintCurrency,
        address fundReceiver,
        address royaltyReceiver,
        uint96 royaltyFeeNumerator
    )
        ERC721CM(
            collectionName,
            collectionSymbol,
            tokenURISuffix,
            maxMintableSupply,
            globalWalletLimit,
            cosigner,
            timestampExpirySeconds,
            mintCurrency,
            fundReceiver
        )
        UpdatableRoyalties(royaltyReceiver, royaltyFeeNumerator)
    {}

    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC2981, ERC721ACQueryable, IERC721A)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721ACQueryable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import {Ownable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import {ERC2981} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/token/common/ERC2981.sol";

/**
 * @title BasicRoyaltiesBase
 */
abstract contract UpdatableRoyalties is ERC2981, Ownable {
    event DefaultRoyaltySet(address indexed receiver, uint96 feeNumerator);
    event TokenRoyaltySet(
        uint256 indexed tokenId,
        address indexed receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    );

    constructor(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    function setDefaultRoyalty(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) public onlyOwner {
        super._setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeNumerator);
        emit DefaultRoyaltySet(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    function setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) public onlyOwner {
        super._setTokenRoyalty(tokenId, receiver, feeNumerator);
        emit TokenRoyaltySet(tokenId, receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

address constant CANONICAL_OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY_ADDRESS = 0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E;
address constant ME_SUBSCRIPTION = 0x0403c10721Ff2936EfF684Bbb57CD792Fd4b1B6c;

address constant MINT_FEE_RECEIVER = 0x0B98151bEdeE73f9Ba5F2C7b72dEa02D38Ce49Fc;

uint64 constant TIMESTAMP_EXPIRY_SECONDS = 300;

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721A.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721Receiver {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}

/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721A is IERC721A {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================

    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;

    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;

    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;

    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;

    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;

    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;

    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;

    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;

    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;

    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;

    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;

    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;

    // =============================================================
    //                            STORAGE
    // =============================================================

    // The next token ID to be minted.
    uint256 private _currentIndex;

    // The number of tokens burned.
    uint256 private _burnCounter;

    // Token name
    string private _name;

    // Token symbol
    string private _symbol;

    // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
    // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
    // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
    //
    // Bits Layout:
    // - [0..159]   `addr`
    // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
    // - [224]      `burned`
    // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
    // - [232..255] `extraData`
    mapping(uint256 => uint256) private _packedOwnerships;

    // Mapping owner address to address data.
    //
    // Bits Layout:
    // - [0..63]    `balance`
    // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
    // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
    // - [192..255] `aux`
    mapping(address => uint256) private _packedAddressData;

    // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
    mapping(uint256 => TokenApprovalRef) private _tokenApprovals;

    // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
    mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) private _operatorApprovals;

    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================

    constructor(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) {
        _name = name_;
        _symbol = symbol_;
        _currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return _currentIndex;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return _currentIndex - _burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return _currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return _burnCounter;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return _packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return (_packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return (_packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(_packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }

    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = _packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        _packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _name;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _symbol;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }

    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnerships[index]);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (_packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            _packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }

    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 curr = tokenId;

        unchecked {
            if (_startTokenId() <= curr)
                if (curr < _currentIndex) {
                    uint256 packed = _packedOwnerships[curr];
                    // If not burned.
                    if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                        // Invariant:
                        // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                        // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                        // before an unintialized ownership slot
                        // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                        // Hence, `curr` will not underflow.
                        //
                        // We can directly compare the packed value.
                        // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                        while (packed == 0) {
                            packed = _packedOwnerships[--curr];
                        }
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);

        if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
            if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
            }

        _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();

        return _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        _operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < _currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            _packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = _tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --_packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++_packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            _packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (_packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        _packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try ERC721A__IERC721Receiver(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data) returns (
            bytes4 retval
        ) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721Receiver(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            _packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            _packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;

            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )

                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();

            _currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            _packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            _packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);

            _currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);

        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = _currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (_currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            _packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            _packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (_packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        _packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            _burnCounter++;
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = _packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        _packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)

            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str

            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }

            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721AQueryable.sol';
import '../ERC721A.sol';

/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryable is ERC721A, IERC721AQueryable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import '../IERC721A.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryable is IERC721A {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721A {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();

    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();

    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();

    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();

    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();

    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================

    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);

    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "erc721a/contracts/extensions/IERC721AQueryable.sol";

interface IERC721M is IERC721AQueryable {
    error CannotIncreaseMaxMintableSupply();
    error CosignerNotSet();
    error CrossmintAddressNotSet();
    error CrossmintOnly();
    error GlobalWalletLimitOverflow();
    error InsufficientStageTimeGap();
    error InvalidCosignSignature();
    error InvalidProof();
    error InvalidStage();
    error InvalidStageArgsLength();
    error InvalidStartAndEndTimestamp();
    error NoSupplyLeft();
    error NotAuthorized();
    error NotEnoughValue();
    error NotMintable();
    error Mintable();
    error StageSupplyExceeded();
    error TimestampExpired();
    error TransferFailed();
    error WalletGlobalLimitExceeded();
    error WalletStageLimitExceeded();
    error WithdrawFailed();
    error WrongMintCurrency();
    error NotSupported();

    struct MintStageInfo {
        uint80 price;
        uint80 mintFee;
        uint32 walletLimit; // 0 for unlimited
        bytes32 merkleRoot; // 0x0 for no presale enforced
        uint24 maxStageSupply; // 0 for unlimited
        uint64 startTimeUnixSeconds;
        uint64 endTimeUnixSeconds;
    }

    event UpdateStage(
        uint256 stage,
        uint80 price,
        uint80 mintFee,
        uint32 walletLimit,
        bytes32 merkleRoot,
        uint24 maxStageSupply,
        uint64 startTimeUnixSeconds,
        uint64 endTimeUnixSeconds
    );

    event SetCosigner(address cosigner);
    event SetCrossmintAddress(address crossmintAddress);
    event SetMintable(bool mintable);
    event SetMaxMintableSupply(uint256 maxMintableSupply);
    event SetGlobalWalletLimit(uint256 globalWalletLimit);
    event SetActiveStage(uint256 activeStage);
    event SetBaseURI(string baseURI);
    event SetTimestampExpirySeconds(uint64 expiry);
    event SetMintCurrency(address mintCurrency);
    event Withdraw(uint256 value);
    event WithdrawERC20(address mintCurrency, uint256 value);

    function getNumberStages() external view returns (uint256);

    function getGlobalWalletLimit() external view returns (uint256);

    function getMaxMintableSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    function totalMintedByAddress(address a) external view returns (uint256);

    function getCosignNonce(address minter) external view returns (uint256);

    function getStageInfo(
        uint256 index
    ) external view returns (MintStageInfo memory, uint32, uint256);

    function mint(
        uint32 qty,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;

    function mintWithLimit(
        uint32 qty,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;

    function crossmint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;

    function authorizedMint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;
}

Contract Name:
ERC721CMRoyalties

Contract Source Code:

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

abstract contract OwnablePermissions is Context {
    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "./ICreatorTokenTransferValidator.sol";

interface ICreatorToken {
    event TransferValidatorUpdated(address oldValidator, address newValidator);

    function getTransferValidator() external view returns (ICreatorTokenTransferValidator);
    function getSecurityPolicy() external view returns (CollectionSecurityPolicy memory);
    function getWhitelistedOperators() external view returns (address[] memory);
    function getPermittedContractReceivers() external view returns (address[] memory);
    function isOperatorWhitelisted(address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function isContractReceiverPermitted(address receiver) external view returns (bool);
    function isTransferAllowed(address caller, address from, address to) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "./IEOARegistry.sol";
import "./ITransferSecurityRegistry.sol";
import "./ITransferValidator.sol";

interface ICreatorTokenTransferValidator is ITransferSecurityRegistry, ITransferValidator, IEOARegistry {}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

interface IEOARegistry is IERC165 {
    function isVerifiedEOA(address account) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../utils/TransferPolicy.sol";

interface ITransferSecurityRegistry {
    event AddedToAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, address indexed account);
    event CreatedAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, string indexed name);
    event ReassignedAllowlistOwnership(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, address indexed newOwner);
    event RemovedFromAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, uint256 indexed id, address indexed account);
    event SetAllowlist(AllowlistTypes indexed kind, address indexed collection, uint120 indexed id);
    event SetTransferSecurityLevel(address indexed collection, TransferSecurityLevels level);

    function createOperatorWhitelist(string calldata name) external returns (uint120);
    function createPermittedContractReceiverAllowlist(string calldata name) external returns (uint120);
    function reassignOwnershipOfOperatorWhitelist(uint120 id, address newOwner) external;
    function reassignOwnershipOfPermittedContractReceiverAllowlist(uint120 id, address newOwner) external;
    function renounceOwnershipOfOperatorWhitelist(uint120 id) external;
    function renounceOwnershipOfPermittedContractReceiverAllowlist(uint120 id) external;
    function setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(address collection, TransferSecurityLevels level) external;
    function setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(address collection, uint120 id) external;
    function setPermittedContractReceiverAllowlistOfCollection(address collection, uint120 id) external;
    function addOperatorToWhitelist(uint120 id, address operator) external;
    function addPermittedContractReceiverToAllowlist(uint120 id, address receiver) external;
    function removeOperatorFromWhitelist(uint120 id, address operator) external;
    function removePermittedContractReceiverFromAllowlist(uint120 id, address receiver) external;
    function getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address collection) external view returns (CollectionSecurityPolicy memory);
    function getWhitelistedOperators(uint120 id) external view returns (address[] memory);
    function getPermittedContractReceivers(uint120 id) external view returns (address[] memory);
    function isOperatorWhitelisted(uint120 id, address operator) external view returns (bool);
    function isContractReceiverPermitted(uint120 id, address receiver) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "../utils/TransferPolicy.sol";

interface ITransferValidator {
    function applyCollectionTransferPolicy(address caller, address from, address to) external view;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

/** 
 * @dev Used in events to indicate the list type that an account or 
 * @dev codehash is being added to or removed from.
 * 
 * @dev Used in Creator Token Standards V2.
 */
enum ListTypes {
    // 0: List type that will block a matching address/codehash that is on the list.
    Blacklist,

    // 1: List type that will block any matching address/codehash that is not on the list.
    Whitelist
}

/** 
 * @dev Used in events to indicate the list type that event relates to.
 * 
 * @dev Used in Creator Token Standards V1.
 */
enum AllowlistTypes {
    // 0: List type that defines the allowed operator addresses.
    Operators,

    // 1: List type that defines the allowed contract receivers.
    PermittedContractReceivers
}

/**
 @dev Defines the constraints that will be applied for receipt of tokens.
 */
enum ReceiverConstraints {
    // 0: Any address may receive tokens.
    None,

    // 1: Address must not have deployed bytecode.
    NoCode,

    // 2: Address must verify a signature with the EOA Registry to prove it is an EOA.
    EOA
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the constraints that will be applied to the transfer caller.
 */
enum CallerConstraints {
    // 0: Any address may transfer tokens.
    None,

    // 1: Addresses and codehashes not on the blacklist may transfer tokens.
    OperatorBlacklistEnableOTC,

    // 2: Addresses and codehashes on the whitelist and the owner of the token may transfer tokens.
    OperatorWhitelistEnableOTC,

    // 3: Addresses and codehashes on the whitelist may transfer tokens.
    OperatorWhitelistDisableOTC
}

/**
 * @dev Defines constraints for staking tokens in token wrapper contracts.
 */
enum StakerConstraints {
    // 0: No constraints applied to staker.
    None,

    // 1: Transaction originator must be the address that will receive the wrapped tokens.
    CallerIsTxOrigin,

    // 2: Address that will receive the wrapped tokens must be a verified EOA.
    EOA
}

/**
 * @dev Used in both Creator Token Standards V1 and V2.
 * @dev Levels may have different transfer restrictions in V1 and V2. Refer to the 
 * @dev Creator Token Transfer Validator implementation for the version being utilized
 * @dev to determine the effect of the selected level.
 */
enum TransferSecurityLevels {
    Recommended,
    One,
    Two,
    Three,
    Four,
    Five,
    Six,
    Seven,
    Eight
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the caller and receiver constraints for a transfer security level.
 * @dev Used in Creator Token Standards V1.
 * 
 * @dev **callerConstraints**: The restrictions applied to the transfer caller.
 * @dev **receiverConstraints**: The restrictions applied to the transfer recipient.
 */
struct TransferSecurityPolicy {
    CallerConstraints callerConstraints;
    ReceiverConstraints receiverConstraints;
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the security policy for a token collection in Creator Token Standards V1.
 * 
 * @dev **transferSecurityLevel**: The transfer security level set for the collection.
 * @dev **operatorWhitelistId**: The list id for the operator whitelist.
 * @dev **permittedContractReceiversId: The list id for the contracts that are allowed to receive tokens.
 */
struct CollectionSecurityPolicy {
    TransferSecurityLevels transferSecurityLevel;
    uint120 operatorWhitelistId;
    uint120 permittedContractReceiversId;
}

/**
 * @dev Defines the security policy for a token collection in Creator Token Standards V2.
 * 
 * @dev **transferSecurityLevel**: The transfer security level set for the collection.
 * @dev **listId**: The list id that contains the blacklist and whitelist to apply to the collection.
 */
struct CollectionSecurityPolicyV2 {
    TransferSecurityLevels transferSecurityLevel;
    uint120 listId;
}

/** 
 * @dev Used internally in the Creator Token Base V2 contract to pack transfer validator configuration.
 * 
 * @dev **isInitialized**: If not initialized by the collection owner or admin the default validator will be used.
 * @dev **version**: The transfer validator version.
 * @dev **transferValidator**: The address of the transfer validator to use for applying collection security settings.
 */
struct TransferValidatorReference {
    bool isInitialized;
    uint16 version;
    address transferValidator;
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/Context.sol";

/**
 * @title TransferValidation
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice A mix-in that can be combined with ERC-721 contracts to provide more granular hooks.
 * Openzeppelin's ERC721 contract only provides hooks for before and after transfer.  This allows
 * developers to validate or customize transfers within the context of a mint, a burn, or a transfer.
 */
abstract contract TransferValidation is Context {
    
    /// @dev Thrown when the from and to address are both the zero address.
    error ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _beforeTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateBeforeTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _preValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _preValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Inheriting contracts should call this function in the _afterTokenTransfer function to get more granular hooks.
    function _validateAfterTransfer(address from, address to, uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        bool fromZeroAddress = from == address(0);
        bool toZeroAddress = to == address(0);

        if(fromZeroAddress && toZeroAddress) {
            revert ShouldNotMintToBurnAddress();
        } else if(fromZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateMint(_msgSender(), to, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else if(toZeroAddress) {
            _postValidateBurn(_msgSender(), from, tokenId, msg.value);
        } else {
            _postValidateTransfer(_msgSender(), from, to, tokenId, msg.value);
        }
    }

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a mint
    function _preValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a mint
    function _postValidateMint(address caller, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a burn
    function _preValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a burn
    function _postValidateBurn(address caller, address from, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires before a transfer
    function _preValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}

    /// @dev Optional validation hook that fires after a transfer
    function _postValidateTransfer(address caller, address from, address to, uint256 tokenId, uint256 value) internal virtual {}
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (access/Ownable.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {Context} from "../utils/Context.sol";

/**
 * @dev Contract module which provides a basic access control mechanism, where
 * there is an account (an owner) that can be granted exclusive access to
 * specific functions.
 *
 * The initial owner is set to the address provided by the deployer. This can
 * later be changed with {transferOwnership}.
 *
 * This module is used through inheritance. It will make available the modifier
 * `onlyOwner`, which can be applied to your functions to restrict their use to
 * the owner.
 */
abstract contract Ownable is Context {
    address private _owner;

    /**
     * @dev The caller account is not authorized to perform an operation.
     */
    error OwnableUnauthorizedAccount(address account);

    /**
     * @dev The owner is not a valid owner account. (eg. `address(0)`)
     */
    error OwnableInvalidOwner(address owner);

    event OwnershipTransferred(address indexed previousOwner, address indexed newOwner);

    /**
     * @dev Initializes the contract setting the address provided by the deployer as the initial owner.
     */
    constructor(address initialOwner) {
        if (initialOwner == address(0)) {
            revert OwnableInvalidOwner(address(0));
        }
        _transferOwnership(initialOwner);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Throws if called by any account other than the owner.
     */
    modifier onlyOwner() {
        _checkOwner();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address of the current owner.
     */
    function owner() public view virtual returns (address) {
        return _owner;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Throws if the sender is not the owner.
     */
    function _checkOwner() internal view virtual {
        if (owner() != _msgSender()) {
            revert OwnableUnauthorizedAccount(_msgSender());
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Leaves the contract without owner. It will not be possible to call
     * `onlyOwner` functions. Can only be called by the current owner.
     *
     * NOTE: Renouncing ownership will leave the contract without an owner,
     * thereby disabling any functionality that is only available to the owner.
     */
    function renounceOwnership() public virtual onlyOwner {
        _transferOwnership(address(0));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Can only be called by the current owner.
     */
    function transferOwnership(address newOwner) public virtual onlyOwner {
        if (newOwner == address(0)) {
            revert OwnableInvalidOwner(address(0));
        }
        _transferOwnership(newOwner);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Transfers ownership of the contract to a new account (`newOwner`).
     * Internal function without access restriction.
     */
    function _transferOwnership(address newOwner) internal virtual {
        address oldOwner = _owner;
        _owner = newOwner;
        emit OwnershipTransferred(oldOwner, newOwner);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (interfaces/IERC1271.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC1271 standard signature validation method for
 * contracts as defined in https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1271[ERC-1271].
 */
interface IERC1271 {
    /**
     * @dev Should return whether the signature provided is valid for the provided data
     * @param hash      Hash of the data to be signed
     * @param signature Signature byte array associated with _data
     */
    function isValidSignature(bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) external view returns (bytes4 magicValue);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (interfaces/IERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC165} from "../utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (interfaces/IERC2981.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC165} from "../utils/introspection/IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Interface for the NFT Royalty Standard.
 *
 * A standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information for non-fungible tokens (NFTs) to enable universal
 * support for royalty payments across all NFT marketplaces and ecosystem participants.
 */
interface IERC2981 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns how much royalty is owed and to whom, based on a sale price that may be denominated in any unit of
     * exchange. The royalty amount is denominated and should be paid in that same unit of exchange.
     */
    function royaltyInfo(
        uint256 tokenId,
        uint256 salePrice
    ) external view returns (address receiver, uint256 royaltyAmount);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/common/ERC2981.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC2981} from "../../interfaces/IERC2981.sol";
import {IERC165, ERC165} from "../../utils/introspection/ERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Implementation of the NFT Royalty Standard, a standardized way to retrieve royalty payment information.
 *
 * Royalty information can be specified globally for all token ids via {_setDefaultRoyalty}, and/or individually for
 * specific token ids via {_setTokenRoyalty}. The latter takes precedence over the first.
 *
 * Royalty is specified as a fraction of sale price. {_feeDenominator} is overridable but defaults to 10000, meaning the
 * fee is specified in basis points by default.
 *
 * IMPORTANT: ERC-2981 only specifies a way to signal royalty information and does not enforce its payment. See
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2981#optional-royalty-payments[Rationale] in the EIP. Marketplaces are expected to
 * voluntarily pay royalties together with sales, but note that this standard is not yet widely supported.
 */
abstract contract ERC2981 is IERC2981, ERC165 {
    struct RoyaltyInfo {
        address receiver;
        uint96 royaltyFraction;
    }

    RoyaltyInfo private _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    mapping(uint256 tokenId => RoyaltyInfo) private _tokenRoyaltyInfo;

    /**
     * @dev The default royalty set is invalid (eg. (numerator / denominator) >= 1).
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyalty(uint256 numerator, uint256 denominator);

    /**
     * @dev The default royalty receiver is invalid.
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyaltyReceiver(address receiver);

    /**
     * @dev The royalty set for an specific `tokenId` is invalid (eg. (numerator / denominator) >= 1).
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId, uint256 numerator, uint256 denominator);

    /**
     * @dev The royalty receiver for `tokenId` is invalid.
     */
    error ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyaltyReceiver(uint256 tokenId, address receiver);

    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override(IERC165, ERC165) returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC2981).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /**
     * @inheritdoc IERC2981
     */
    function royaltyInfo(uint256 tokenId, uint256 salePrice) public view virtual returns (address, uint256) {
        RoyaltyInfo memory royalty = _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];

        if (royalty.receiver == address(0)) {
            royalty = _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
        }

        uint256 royaltyAmount = (salePrice * royalty.royaltyFraction) / _feeDenominator();

        return (royalty.receiver, royaltyAmount);
    }

    /**
     * @dev The denominator with which to interpret the fee set in {_setTokenRoyalty} and {_setDefaultRoyalty} as a
     * fraction of the sale price. Defaults to 10000 so fees are expressed in basis points, but may be customized by an
     * override.
     */
    function _feeDenominator() internal pure virtual returns (uint96) {
        return 10000;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information that all ids in this contract will default to.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setDefaultRoyalty(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        uint256 denominator = _feeDenominator();
        if (feeNumerator > denominator) {
            // Royalty fee will exceed the sale price
            revert ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyalty(feeNumerator, denominator);
        }
        if (receiver == address(0)) {
            revert ERC2981InvalidDefaultRoyaltyReceiver(address(0));
        }

        _defaultRoyaltyInfo = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Removes default royalty information.
     */
    function _deleteDefaultRoyalty() internal virtual {
        delete _defaultRoyaltyInfo;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets the royalty information for a specific token id, overriding the global default.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `receiver` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `feeNumerator` cannot be greater than the fee denominator.
     */
    function _setTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId, address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) internal virtual {
        uint256 denominator = _feeDenominator();
        if (feeNumerator > denominator) {
            // Royalty fee will exceed the sale price
            revert ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyalty(tokenId, feeNumerator, denominator);
        }
        if (receiver == address(0)) {
            revert ERC2981InvalidTokenRoyaltyReceiver(tokenId, address(0));
        }

        _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId] = RoyaltyInfo(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Resets royalty information for the token id back to the global default.
     */
    function _resetTokenRoyalty(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        delete _tokenRoyaltyInfo[tokenId];
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/ERC20/extensions/IERC20Permit.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 Permit extension allowing approvals to be made via signatures, as defined in
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612[EIP-2612].
 *
 * Adds the {permit} method, which can be used to change an account's ERC20 allowance (see {IERC20-allowance}) by
 * presenting a message signed by the account. By not relying on {IERC20-approve}, the token holder account doesn't
 * need to send a transaction, and thus is not required to hold Ether at all.
 *
 * ==== Security Considerations
 *
 * There are two important considerations concerning the use of `permit`. The first is that a valid permit signature
 * expresses an allowance, and it should not be assumed to convey additional meaning. In particular, it should not be
 * considered as an intention to spend the allowance in any specific way. The second is that because permits have
 * built-in replay protection and can be submitted by anyone, they can be frontrun. A protocol that uses permits should
 * take this into consideration and allow a `permit` call to fail. Combining these two aspects, a pattern that may be
 * generally recommended is:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function doThingWithPermit(..., uint256 value, uint256 deadline, uint8 v, bytes32 r, bytes32 s) public {
 *     try token.permit(msg.sender, address(this), value, deadline, v, r, s) {} catch {}
 *     doThing(..., value);
 * }
 *
 * function doThing(..., uint256 value) public {
 *     token.safeTransferFrom(msg.sender, address(this), value);
 *     ...
 * }
 * ```
 *
 * Observe that: 1) `msg.sender` is used as the owner, leaving no ambiguity as to the signer intent, and 2) the use of
 * `try/catch` allows the permit to fail and makes the code tolerant to frontrunning. (See also
 * {SafeERC20-safeTransferFrom}).
 *
 * Additionally, note that smart contract wallets (such as Argent or Safe) are not able to produce permit signatures, so
 * contracts should have entry points that don't rely on permit.
 */
interface IERC20Permit {
    /**
     * @dev Sets `value` as the allowance of `spender` over ``owner``'s tokens,
     * given ``owner``'s signed approval.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: The same issues {IERC20-approve} has related to transaction
     * ordering also apply here.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `spender` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `deadline` must be a timestamp in the future.
     * - `v`, `r` and `s` must be a valid `secp256k1` signature from `owner`
     * over the EIP712-formatted function arguments.
     * - the signature must use ``owner``'s current nonce (see {nonces}).
     *
     * For more information on the signature format, see the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2612#specification[relevant EIP
     * section].
     *
     * CAUTION: See Security Considerations above.
     */
    function permit(
        address owner,
        address spender,
        uint256 value,
        uint256 deadline,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) external;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the current nonce for `owner`. This value must be
     * included whenever a signature is generated for {permit}.
     *
     * Every successful call to {permit} increases ``owner``'s nonce by one. This
     * prevents a signature from being used multiple times.
     */
    function nonces(address owner) external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the domain separator used in the encoding of the signature for {permit}, as defined by {EIP712}.
     */
    // solhint-disable-next-line func-name-mixedcase
    function DOMAIN_SEPARATOR() external view returns (bytes32);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/ERC20/IERC20.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC20 standard as defined in the EIP.
 */
interface IERC20 {
    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `value` tokens are moved from one account (`from`) to
     * another (`to`).
     *
     * Note that `value` may be zero.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 value);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when the allowance of a `spender` for an `owner` is set by
     * a call to {approve}. `value` is the new allowance.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed spender, uint256 value);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the value of tokens in existence.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the value of tokens owned by `account`.
     */
    function balanceOf(address account) external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Moves a `value` amount of tokens from the caller's account to `to`.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transfer(address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the remaining number of tokens that `spender` will be
     * allowed to spend on behalf of `owner` through {transferFrom}. This is
     * zero by default.
     *
     * This value changes when {approve} or {transferFrom} are called.
     */
    function allowance(address owner, address spender) external view returns (uint256);

    /**
     * @dev Sets a `value` amount of tokens as the allowance of `spender` over the
     * caller's tokens.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: Beware that changing an allowance with this method brings the risk
     * that someone may use both the old and the new allowance by unfortunate
     * transaction ordering. One possible solution to mitigate this race
     * condition is to first reduce the spender's allowance to 0 and set the
     * desired value afterwards:
     * https://github.com/ethereum/EIPs/issues/20#issuecomment-263524729
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address spender, uint256 value) external returns (bool);

    /**
     * @dev Moves a `value` amount of tokens from `from` to `to` using the
     * allowance mechanism. `value` is then deducted from the caller's
     * allowance.
     *
     * Returns a boolean value indicating whether the operation succeeded.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(address from, address to, uint256 value) external returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC20} from "../IERC20.sol";
import {IERC20Permit} from "../extensions/IERC20Permit.sol";
import {Address} from "../../../utils/Address.sol";

/**
 * @title SafeERC20
 * @dev Wrappers around ERC20 operations that throw on failure (when the token
 * contract returns false). Tokens that return no value (and instead revert or
 * throw on failure) are also supported, non-reverting calls are assumed to be
 * successful.
 * To use this library you can add a `using SafeERC20 for IERC20;` statement to your contract,
 * which allows you to call the safe operations as `token.safeTransfer(...)`, etc.
 */
library SafeERC20 {
    using Address for address;

    /**
     * @dev An operation with an ERC20 token failed.
     */
    error SafeERC20FailedOperation(address token);

    /**
     * @dev Indicates a failed `decreaseAllowance` request.
     */
    error SafeERC20FailedDecreaseAllowance(address spender, uint256 currentAllowance, uint256 requestedDecrease);

    /**
     * @dev Transfer `value` amount of `token` from the calling contract to `to`. If `token` returns no value,
     * non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeTransfer(IERC20 token, address to, uint256 value) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeCall(token.transfer, (to, value)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Transfer `value` amount of `token` from `from` to `to`, spending the approval given by `from` to the
     * calling contract. If `token` returns no value, non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(IERC20 token, address from, address to, uint256 value) internal {
        _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeCall(token.transferFrom, (from, to, value)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Increase the calling contract's allowance toward `spender` by `value`. If `token` returns no value,
     * non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeIncreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
        uint256 oldAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
        forceApprove(token, spender, oldAllowance + value);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Decrease the calling contract's allowance toward `spender` by `requestedDecrease`. If `token` returns no
     * value, non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful.
     */
    function safeDecreaseAllowance(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 requestedDecrease) internal {
        unchecked {
            uint256 currentAllowance = token.allowance(address(this), spender);
            if (currentAllowance < requestedDecrease) {
                revert SafeERC20FailedDecreaseAllowance(spender, currentAllowance, requestedDecrease);
            }
            forceApprove(token, spender, currentAllowance - requestedDecrease);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Set the calling contract's allowance toward `spender` to `value`. If `token` returns no value,
     * non-reverting calls are assumed to be successful. Meant to be used with tokens that require the approval
     * to be set to zero before setting it to a non-zero value, such as USDT.
     */
    function forceApprove(IERC20 token, address spender, uint256 value) internal {
        bytes memory approvalCall = abi.encodeCall(token.approve, (spender, value));

        if (!_callOptionalReturnBool(token, approvalCall)) {
            _callOptionalReturn(token, abi.encodeCall(token.approve, (spender, 0)));
            _callOptionalReturn(token, approvalCall);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     */
    function _callOptionalReturn(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We use {Address-functionCall} to perform this call, which verifies that
        // the target address contains contract code and also asserts for success in the low-level call.

        bytes memory returndata = address(token).functionCall(data);
        if (returndata.length != 0 && !abi.decode(returndata, (bool))) {
            revert SafeERC20FailedOperation(address(token));
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Imitates a Solidity high-level call (i.e. a regular function call to a contract), relaxing the requirement
     * on the return value: the return value is optional (but if data is returned, it must not be false).
     * @param token The token targeted by the call.
     * @param data The call data (encoded using abi.encode or one of its variants).
     *
     * This is a variant of {_callOptionalReturn} that silents catches all reverts and returns a bool instead.
     */
    function _callOptionalReturnBool(IERC20 token, bytes memory data) private returns (bool) {
        // We need to perform a low level call here, to bypass Solidity's return data size checking mechanism, since
        // we're implementing it ourselves. We cannot use {Address-functionCall} here since this should return false
        // and not revert is the subcall reverts.

        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = address(token).call(data);
        return success && (returndata.length == 0 || abi.decode(returndata, (bool))) && address(token).code.length > 0;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/Address.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Collection of functions related to the address type
 */
library Address {
    /**
     * @dev The ETH balance of the account is not enough to perform the operation.
     */
    error AddressInsufficientBalance(address account);

    /**
     * @dev There's no code at `target` (it is not a contract).
     */
    error AddressEmptyCode(address target);

    /**
     * @dev A call to an address target failed. The target may have reverted.
     */
    error FailedInnerCall();

    /**
     * @dev Replacement for Solidity's `transfer`: sends `amount` wei to
     * `recipient`, forwarding all available gas and reverting on errors.
     *
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-1884[EIP1884] increases the gas cost
     * of certain opcodes, possibly making contracts go over the 2300 gas limit
     * imposed by `transfer`, making them unable to receive funds via
     * `transfer`. {sendValue} removes this limitation.
     *
     * https://consensys.net/diligence/blog/2019/09/stop-using-soliditys-transfer-now/[Learn more].
     *
     * IMPORTANT: because control is transferred to `recipient`, care must be
     * taken to not create reentrancy vulnerabilities. Consider using
     * {ReentrancyGuard} or the
     * https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/v0.8.20/security-considerations.html#use-the-checks-effects-interactions-pattern[checks-effects-interactions pattern].
     */
    function sendValue(address payable recipient, uint256 amount) internal {
        if (address(this).balance < amount) {
            revert AddressInsufficientBalance(address(this));
        }

        (bool success, ) = recipient.call{value: amount}("");
        if (!success) {
            revert FailedInnerCall();
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Performs a Solidity function call using a low level `call`. A
     * plain `call` is an unsafe replacement for a function call: use this
     * function instead.
     *
     * If `target` reverts with a revert reason or custom error, it is bubbled
     * up by this function (like regular Solidity function calls). However, if
     * the call reverted with no returned reason, this function reverts with a
     * {FailedInnerCall} error.
     *
     * Returns the raw returned data. To convert to the expected return value,
     * use https://solidity.readthedocs.io/en/latest/units-and-global-variables.html?highlight=abi.decode#abi-encoding-and-decoding-functions[`abi.decode`].
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `target` must be a contract.
     * - calling `target` with `data` must not revert.
     */
    function functionCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        return functionCallWithValue(target, data, 0);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but also transferring `value` wei to `target`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - the calling contract must have an ETH balance of at least `value`.
     * - the called Solidity function must be `payable`.
     */
    function functionCallWithValue(address target, bytes memory data, uint256 value) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        if (address(this).balance < value) {
            revert AddressInsufficientBalance(address(this));
        }
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.call{value: value}(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a static call.
     */
    function functionStaticCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.staticcall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Same as {xref-Address-functionCall-address-bytes-}[`functionCall`],
     * but performing a delegate call.
     */
    function functionDelegateCall(address target, bytes memory data) internal returns (bytes memory) {
        (bool success, bytes memory returndata) = target.delegatecall(data);
        return verifyCallResultFromTarget(target, success, returndata);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call to smart-contract was successful, and reverts if the target
     * was not a contract or bubbling up the revert reason (falling back to {FailedInnerCall}) in case of an
     * unsuccessful call.
     */
    function verifyCallResultFromTarget(
        address target,
        bool success,
        bytes memory returndata
    ) internal view returns (bytes memory) {
        if (!success) {
            _revert(returndata);
        } else {
            // only check if target is a contract if the call was successful and the return data is empty
            // otherwise we already know that it was a contract
            if (returndata.length == 0 && target.code.length == 0) {
                revert AddressEmptyCode(target);
            }
            return returndata;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Tool to verify that a low level call was successful, and reverts if it wasn't, either by bubbling the
     * revert reason or with a default {FailedInnerCall} error.
     */
    function verifyCallResult(bool success, bytes memory returndata) internal pure returns (bytes memory) {
        if (!success) {
            _revert(returndata);
        } else {
            return returndata;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Reverts with returndata if present. Otherwise reverts with {FailedInnerCall}.
     */
    function _revert(bytes memory returndata) private pure {
        // Look for revert reason and bubble it up if present
        if (returndata.length > 0) {
            // The easiest way to bubble the revert reason is using memory via assembly
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                let returndata_size := mload(returndata)
                revert(add(32, returndata), returndata_size)
            }
        } else {
            revert FailedInnerCall();
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.1) (utils/Context.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Provides information about the current execution context, including the
 * sender of the transaction and its data. While these are generally available
 * via msg.sender and msg.data, they should not be accessed in such a direct
 * manner, since when dealing with meta-transactions the account sending and
 * paying for execution may not be the actual sender (as far as an application
 * is concerned).
 *
 * This contract is only required for intermediate, library-like contracts.
 */
abstract contract Context {
    function _msgSender() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    function _msgData() internal view virtual returns (bytes calldata) {
        return msg.data;
    }

    function _contextSuffixLength() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/ECDSA.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Elliptic Curve Digital Signature Algorithm (ECDSA) operations.
 *
 * These functions can be used to verify that a message was signed by the holder
 * of the private keys of a given address.
 */
library ECDSA {
    enum RecoverError {
        NoError,
        InvalidSignature,
        InvalidSignatureLength,
        InvalidSignatureS
    }

    /**
     * @dev The signature derives the `address(0)`.
     */
    error ECDSAInvalidSignature();

    /**
     * @dev The signature has an invalid length.
     */
    error ECDSAInvalidSignatureLength(uint256 length);

    /**
     * @dev The signature has an S value that is in the upper half order.
     */
    error ECDSAInvalidSignatureS(bytes32 s);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address that signed a hashed message (`hash`) with `signature` or an error. This will not
     * return address(0) without also returning an error description. Errors are documented using an enum (error type)
     * and a bytes32 providing additional information about the error.
     *
     * If no error is returned, then the address can be used for verification purposes.
     *
     * The `ecrecover` EVM precompile allows for malleable (non-unique) signatures:
     * this function rejects them by requiring the `s` value to be in the lower
     * half order, and the `v` value to be either 27 or 28.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: `hash` _must_ be the result of a hash operation for the
     * verification to be secure: it is possible to craft signatures that
     * recover to arbitrary addresses for non-hashed data. A safe way to ensure
     * this is by receiving a hash of the original message (which may otherwise
     * be too long), and then calling {MessageHashUtils-toEthSignedMessageHash} on it.
     *
     * Documentation for signature generation:
     * - with https://web3js.readthedocs.io/en/v1.3.4/web3-eth-accounts.html#sign[Web3.js]
     * - with https://docs.ethers.io/v5/api/signer/#Signer-signMessage[ethers]
     */
    function tryRecover(bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) internal pure returns (address, RecoverError, bytes32) {
        if (signature.length == 65) {
            bytes32 r;
            bytes32 s;
            uint8 v;
            // ecrecover takes the signature parameters, and the only way to get them
            // currently is to use assembly.
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                r := mload(add(signature, 0x20))
                s := mload(add(signature, 0x40))
                v := byte(0, mload(add(signature, 0x60)))
            }
            return tryRecover(hash, v, r, s);
        } else {
            return (address(0), RecoverError.InvalidSignatureLength, bytes32(signature.length));
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the address that signed a hashed message (`hash`) with
     * `signature`. This address can then be used for verification purposes.
     *
     * The `ecrecover` EVM precompile allows for malleable (non-unique) signatures:
     * this function rejects them by requiring the `s` value to be in the lower
     * half order, and the `v` value to be either 27 or 28.
     *
     * IMPORTANT: `hash` _must_ be the result of a hash operation for the
     * verification to be secure: it is possible to craft signatures that
     * recover to arbitrary addresses for non-hashed data. A safe way to ensure
     * this is by receiving a hash of the original message (which may otherwise
     * be too long), and then calling {MessageHashUtils-toEthSignedMessageHash} on it.
     */
    function recover(bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) internal pure returns (address) {
        (address recovered, RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) = tryRecover(hash, signature);
        _throwError(error, errorArg);
        return recovered;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-tryRecover} that receives the `r` and `vs` short-signature fields separately.
     *
     * See https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2098[EIP-2098 short signatures]
     */
    function tryRecover(bytes32 hash, bytes32 r, bytes32 vs) internal pure returns (address, RecoverError, bytes32) {
        unchecked {
            bytes32 s = vs & bytes32(0x7fffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff);
            // We do not check for an overflow here since the shift operation results in 0 or 1.
            uint8 v = uint8((uint256(vs) >> 255) + 27);
            return tryRecover(hash, v, r, s);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-recover} that receives the `r and `vs` short-signature fields separately.
     */
    function recover(bytes32 hash, bytes32 r, bytes32 vs) internal pure returns (address) {
        (address recovered, RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) = tryRecover(hash, r, vs);
        _throwError(error, errorArg);
        return recovered;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-tryRecover} that receives the `v`,
     * `r` and `s` signature fields separately.
     */
    function tryRecover(
        bytes32 hash,
        uint8 v,
        bytes32 r,
        bytes32 s
    ) internal pure returns (address, RecoverError, bytes32) {
        // EIP-2 still allows signature malleability for ecrecover(). Remove this possibility and make the signature
        // unique. Appendix F in the Ethereum Yellow paper (https://ethereum.github.io/yellowpaper/paper.pdf), defines
        // the valid range for s in (301): 0 < s < secp256k1n ÷ 2 + 1, and for v in (302): v ∈ {27, 28}. Most
        // signatures from current libraries generate a unique signature with an s-value in the lower half order.
        //
        // If your library generates malleable signatures, such as s-values in the upper range, calculate a new s-value
        // with 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFEBAAEDCE6AF48A03BBFD25E8CD0364141 - s1 and flip v from 27 to 28 or
        // vice versa. If your library also generates signatures with 0/1 for v instead 27/28, add 27 to v to accept
        // these malleable signatures as well.
        if (uint256(s) > 0x7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF5D576E7357A4501DDFE92F46681B20A0) {
            return (address(0), RecoverError.InvalidSignatureS, s);
        }

        // If the signature is valid (and not malleable), return the signer address
        address signer = ecrecover(hash, v, r, s);
        if (signer == address(0)) {
            return (address(0), RecoverError.InvalidSignature, bytes32(0));
        }

        return (signer, RecoverError.NoError, bytes32(0));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Overload of {ECDSA-recover} that receives the `v`,
     * `r` and `s` signature fields separately.
     */
    function recover(bytes32 hash, uint8 v, bytes32 r, bytes32 s) internal pure returns (address) {
        (address recovered, RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) = tryRecover(hash, v, r, s);
        _throwError(error, errorArg);
        return recovered;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Optionally reverts with the corresponding custom error according to the `error` argument provided.
     */
    function _throwError(RecoverError error, bytes32 errorArg) private pure {
        if (error == RecoverError.NoError) {
            return; // no error: do nothing
        } else if (error == RecoverError.InvalidSignature) {
            revert ECDSAInvalidSignature();
        } else if (error == RecoverError.InvalidSignatureLength) {
            revert ECDSAInvalidSignatureLength(uint256(errorArg));
        } else if (error == RecoverError.InvalidSignatureS) {
            revert ECDSAInvalidSignatureS(errorArg);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev These functions deal with verification of Merkle Tree proofs.
 *
 * The tree and the proofs can be generated using our
 * https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/merkle-tree[JavaScript library].
 * You will find a quickstart guide in the readme.
 *
 * WARNING: You should avoid using leaf values that are 64 bytes long prior to
 * hashing, or use a hash function other than keccak256 for hashing leaves.
 * This is because the concatenation of a sorted pair of internal nodes in
 * the Merkle tree could be reinterpreted as a leaf value.
 * OpenZeppelin's JavaScript library generates Merkle trees that are safe
 * against this attack out of the box.
 */
library MerkleProof {
    /**
     *@dev The multiproof provided is not valid.
     */
    error MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if a `leaf` can be proved to be a part of a Merkle tree
     * defined by `root`. For this, a `proof` must be provided, containing
     * sibling hashes on the branch from the leaf to the root of the tree. Each
     * pair of leaves and each pair of pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function verify(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 root, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProof(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {verify}
     */
    function verifyCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 root, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processProofCalldata(proof, leaf) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the rebuilt hash obtained by traversing a Merkle tree up
     * from `leaf` using `proof`. A `proof` is valid if and only if the rebuilt
     * hash matches the root of the tree. When processing the proof, the pairs
     * of leafs & pre-images are assumed to be sorted.
     */
    function processProof(bytes32[] memory proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processProof}
     */
    function processProofCalldata(bytes32[] calldata proof, bytes32 leaf) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        bytes32 computedHash = leaf;
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < proof.length; i++) {
            computedHash = _hashPair(computedHash, proof[i]);
        }
        return computedHash;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the `leaves` can be simultaneously proven to be a part of a Merkle tree defined by
     * `root`, according to `proof` and `proofFlags` as described in {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     */
    function multiProofVerify(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProof(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {multiProofVerify}
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     */
    function multiProofVerifyCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32 root,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return processMultiProofCalldata(proof, proofFlags, leaves) == root;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the root of a tree reconstructed from `leaves` and sibling nodes in `proof`. The reconstruction
     * proceeds by incrementally reconstructing all inner nodes by combining a leaf/inner node with either another
     * leaf/inner node or a proof sibling node, depending on whether each `proofFlags` item is true or false
     * respectively.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. To use multiproofs, it is sufficient to ensure that: 1) the tree
     * is complete (but not necessarily perfect), 2) the leaves to be proven are in the opposite order they are in the
     * tree (i.e., as seen from right to left starting at the deepest layer and continuing at the next layer).
     */
    function processMultiProof(
        bytes32[] memory proof,
        bool[] memory proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuilds the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the Merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 proofLen = proof.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        if (leavesLen + proofLen != totalHashes + 1) {
            revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
        }

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value from the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i]
                ? (leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++])
                : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            if (proofPos != proofLen) {
                revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
            }
            unchecked {
                return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
            }
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Calldata version of {processMultiProof}.
     *
     * CAUTION: Not all Merkle trees admit multiproofs. See {processMultiProof} for details.
     */
    function processMultiProofCalldata(
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        bool[] calldata proofFlags,
        bytes32[] memory leaves
    ) internal pure returns (bytes32 merkleRoot) {
        // This function rebuilds the root hash by traversing the tree up from the leaves. The root is rebuilt by
        // consuming and producing values on a queue. The queue starts with the `leaves` array, then goes onto the
        // `hashes` array. At the end of the process, the last hash in the `hashes` array should contain the root of
        // the Merkle tree.
        uint256 leavesLen = leaves.length;
        uint256 proofLen = proof.length;
        uint256 totalHashes = proofFlags.length;

        // Check proof validity.
        if (leavesLen + proofLen != totalHashes + 1) {
            revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
        }

        // The xxxPos values are "pointers" to the next value to consume in each array. All accesses are done using
        // `xxx[xxxPos++]`, which return the current value and increment the pointer, thus mimicking a queue's "pop".
        bytes32[] memory hashes = new bytes32[](totalHashes);
        uint256 leafPos = 0;
        uint256 hashPos = 0;
        uint256 proofPos = 0;
        // At each step, we compute the next hash using two values:
        // - a value from the "main queue". If not all leaves have been consumed, we get the next leaf, otherwise we
        //   get the next hash.
        // - depending on the flag, either another value from the "main queue" (merging branches) or an element from the
        //   `proof` array.
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < totalHashes; i++) {
            bytes32 a = leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++];
            bytes32 b = proofFlags[i]
                ? (leafPos < leavesLen ? leaves[leafPos++] : hashes[hashPos++])
                : proof[proofPos++];
            hashes[i] = _hashPair(a, b);
        }

        if (totalHashes > 0) {
            if (proofPos != proofLen) {
                revert MerkleProofInvalidMultiproof();
            }
            unchecked {
                return hashes[totalHashes - 1];
            }
        } else if (leavesLen > 0) {
            return leaves[0];
        } else {
            return proof[0];
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sorts the pair (a, b) and hashes the result.
     */
    function _hashPair(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32) {
        return a < b ? _efficientHash(a, b) : _efficientHash(b, a);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Implementation of keccak256(abi.encode(a, b)) that doesn't allocate or expand memory.
     */
    function _efficientHash(bytes32 a, bytes32 b) private pure returns (bytes32 value) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, a)
            mstore(0x20, b)
            value := keccak256(0x00, 0x40)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/MessageHashUtils.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {Strings} from "../Strings.sol";

/**
 * @dev Signature message hash utilities for producing digests to be consumed by {ECDSA} recovery or signing.
 *
 * The library provides methods for generating a hash of a message that conforms to the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-191[EIP 191] and https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-712[EIP 712]
 * specifications.
 */
library MessageHashUtils {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-191 signed data with version
     * `0x45` (`personal_sign` messages).
     *
     * The digest is calculated by prefixing a bytes32 `messageHash` with
     * `"\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n32"` and hashing the result. It corresponds with the
     * hash signed when using the https://eth.wiki/json-rpc/API#eth_sign[`eth_sign`] JSON-RPC method.
     *
     * NOTE: The `messageHash` parameter is intended to be the result of hashing a raw message with
     * keccak256, although any bytes32 value can be safely used because the final digest will
     * be re-hashed.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toEthSignedMessageHash(bytes32 messageHash) internal pure returns (bytes32 digest) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            mstore(0x00, "\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n32") // 32 is the bytes-length of messageHash
            mstore(0x1c, messageHash) // 0x1c (28) is the length of the prefix
            digest := keccak256(0x00, 0x3c) // 0x3c is the length of the prefix (0x1c) + messageHash (0x20)
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-191 signed data with version
     * `0x45` (`personal_sign` messages).
     *
     * The digest is calculated by prefixing an arbitrary `message` with
     * `"\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n" + len(message)` and hashing the result. It corresponds with the
     * hash signed when using the https://eth.wiki/json-rpc/API#eth_sign[`eth_sign`] JSON-RPC method.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toEthSignedMessageHash(bytes memory message) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        return
            keccak256(bytes.concat("\x19Ethereum Signed Message:\n", bytes(Strings.toString(message.length)), message));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-191 signed data with version
     * `0x00` (data with intended validator).
     *
     * The digest is calculated by prefixing an arbitrary `data` with `"\x19\x00"` and the intended
     * `validator` address. Then hashing the result.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toDataWithIntendedValidatorHash(address validator, bytes memory data) internal pure returns (bytes32) {
        return keccak256(abi.encodePacked(hex"19_00", validator, data));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the keccak256 digest of an EIP-712 typed data (EIP-191 version `0x01`).
     *
     * The digest is calculated from a `domainSeparator` and a `structHash`, by prefixing them with
     * `\x19\x01` and hashing the result. It corresponds to the hash signed by the
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-712[`eth_signTypedData`] JSON-RPC method as part of EIP-712.
     *
     * See {ECDSA-recover}.
     */
    function toTypedDataHash(bytes32 domainSeparator, bytes32 structHash) internal pure returns (bytes32 digest) {
        /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
        assembly {
            let ptr := mload(0x40)
            mstore(ptr, hex"19_01")
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x02), domainSeparator)
            mstore(add(ptr, 0x22), structHash)
            digest := keccak256(ptr, 0x42)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/cryptography/SignatureChecker.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {ECDSA} from "./ECDSA.sol";
import {IERC1271} from "../../interfaces/IERC1271.sol";

/**
 * @dev Signature verification helper that can be used instead of `ECDSA.recover` to seamlessly support both ECDSA
 * signatures from externally owned accounts (EOAs) as well as ERC1271 signatures from smart contract wallets like
 * Argent and Safe Wallet (previously Gnosis Safe).
 */
library SignatureChecker {
    /**
     * @dev Checks if a signature is valid for a given signer and data hash. If the signer is a smart contract, the
     * signature is validated against that smart contract using ERC1271, otherwise it's validated using `ECDSA.recover`.
     *
     * NOTE: Unlike ECDSA signatures, contract signatures are revocable, and the outcome of this function can thus
     * change through time. It could return true at block N and false at block N+1 (or the opposite).
     */
    function isValidSignatureNow(address signer, bytes32 hash, bytes memory signature) internal view returns (bool) {
        (address recovered, ECDSA.RecoverError error, ) = ECDSA.tryRecover(hash, signature);
        return
            (error == ECDSA.RecoverError.NoError && recovered == signer) ||
            isValidERC1271SignatureNow(signer, hash, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Checks if a signature is valid for a given signer and data hash. The signature is validated
     * against the signer smart contract using ERC1271.
     *
     * NOTE: Unlike ECDSA signatures, contract signatures are revocable, and the outcome of this function can thus
     * change through time. It could return true at block N and false at block N+1 (or the opposite).
     */
    function isValidERC1271SignatureNow(
        address signer,
        bytes32 hash,
        bytes memory signature
    ) internal view returns (bool) {
        (bool success, bytes memory result) = signer.staticcall(
            abi.encodeCall(IERC1271.isValidSignature, (hash, signature))
        );
        return (success &&
            result.length >= 32 &&
            abi.decode(result, (bytes32)) == bytes32(IERC1271.isValidSignature.selector));
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/introspection/ERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {IERC165} from "./IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @dev Implementation of the {IERC165} interface.
 *
 * Contracts that want to implement ERC165 should inherit from this contract and override {supportsInterface} to check
 * for the additional interface id that will be supported. For example:
 *
 * ```solidity
 * function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
 *     return interfaceId == type(MyInterface).interfaceId || super.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
 * }
 * ```
 */
abstract contract ERC165 is IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev See {IERC165-supportsInterface}.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual returns (bool) {
        return interfaceId == type(IERC165).interfaceId;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/introspection/IERC165.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Interface of the ERC165 standard, as defined in the
 * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165[EIP].
 *
 * Implementers can declare support of contract interfaces, which can then be
 * queried by others ({ERC165Checker}).
 *
 * For an implementation, see {ERC165}.
 */
interface IERC165 {
    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified[EIP section]
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30 000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/math/Math.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Standard math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library Math {
    /**
     * @dev Muldiv operation overflow.
     */
    error MathOverflowedMulDiv();

    enum Rounding {
        Floor, // Toward negative infinity
        Ceil, // Toward positive infinity
        Trunc, // Toward zero
        Expand // Away from zero
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the addition of two unsigned integers, with an overflow flag.
     */
    function tryAdd(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 c = a + b;
            if (c < a) return (false, 0);
            return (true, c);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the subtraction of two unsigned integers, with an overflow flag.
     */
    function trySub(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            if (b > a) return (false, 0);
            return (true, a - b);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the multiplication of two unsigned integers, with an overflow flag.
     */
    function tryMul(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            // Gas optimization: this is cheaper than requiring 'a' not being zero, but the
            // benefit is lost if 'b' is also tested.
            // See: https://github.com/OpenZeppelin/openzeppelin-contracts/pull/522
            if (a == 0) return (true, 0);
            uint256 c = a * b;
            if (c / a != b) return (false, 0);
            return (true, c);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the division of two unsigned integers, with a division by zero flag.
     */
    function tryDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            if (b == 0) return (false, 0);
            return (true, a / b);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the remainder of dividing two unsigned integers, with a division by zero flag.
     */
    function tryMod(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (bool, uint256) {
        unchecked {
            if (b == 0) return (false, 0);
            return (true, a % b);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two numbers.
     */
    function max(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two numbers.
     */
    function min(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two numbers. The result is rounded towards
     * zero.
     */
    function average(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        // (a + b) / 2 can overflow.
        return (a & b) + (a ^ b) / 2;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the ceiling of the division of two numbers.
     *
     * This differs from standard division with `/` in that it rounds towards infinity instead
     * of rounding towards zero.
     */
    function ceilDiv(uint256 a, uint256 b) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (b == 0) {
            // Guarantee the same behavior as in a regular Solidity division.
            return a / b;
        }

        // (a + b - 1) / b can overflow on addition, so we distribute.
        return a == 0 ? 0 : (a - 1) / b + 1;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates floor(x * y / denominator) with full precision. Throws if result overflows a uint256 or
     * denominator == 0.
     * @dev Original credit to Remco Bloemen under MIT license (https://xn--2-umb.com/21/muldiv) with further edits by
     * Uniswap Labs also under MIT license.
     */
    function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator) internal pure returns (uint256 result) {
        unchecked {
            // 512-bit multiply [prod1 prod0] = x * y. Compute the product mod 2^256 and mod 2^256 - 1, then use
            // use the Chinese Remainder Theorem to reconstruct the 512 bit result. The result is stored in two 256
            // variables such that product = prod1 * 2^256 + prod0.
            uint256 prod0 = x * y; // Least significant 256 bits of the product
            uint256 prod1; // Most significant 256 bits of the product
            assembly {
                let mm := mulmod(x, y, not(0))
                prod1 := sub(sub(mm, prod0), lt(mm, prod0))
            }

            // Handle non-overflow cases, 256 by 256 division.
            if (prod1 == 0) {
                // Solidity will revert if denominator == 0, unlike the div opcode on its own.
                // The surrounding unchecked block does not change this fact.
                // See https://docs.soliditylang.org/en/latest/control-structures.html#checked-or-unchecked-arithmetic.
                return prod0 / denominator;
            }

            // Make sure the result is less than 2^256. Also prevents denominator == 0.
            if (denominator <= prod1) {
                revert MathOverflowedMulDiv();
            }

            ///////////////////////////////////////////////
            // 512 by 256 division.
            ///////////////////////////////////////////////

            // Make division exact by subtracting the remainder from [prod1 prod0].
            uint256 remainder;
            assembly {
                // Compute remainder using mulmod.
                remainder := mulmod(x, y, denominator)

                // Subtract 256 bit number from 512 bit number.
                prod1 := sub(prod1, gt(remainder, prod0))
                prod0 := sub(prod0, remainder)
            }

            // Factor powers of two out of denominator and compute largest power of two divisor of denominator.
            // Always >= 1. See https://cs.stackexchange.com/q/138556/92363.

            uint256 twos = denominator & (0 - denominator);
            assembly {
                // Divide denominator by twos.
                denominator := div(denominator, twos)

                // Divide [prod1 prod0] by twos.
                prod0 := div(prod0, twos)

                // Flip twos such that it is 2^256 / twos. If twos is zero, then it becomes one.
                twos := add(div(sub(0, twos), twos), 1)
            }

            // Shift in bits from prod1 into prod0.
            prod0 |= prod1 * twos;

            // Invert denominator mod 2^256. Now that denominator is an odd number, it has an inverse modulo 2^256 such
            // that denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^256. Compute the inverse by starting with a seed that is correct for
            // four bits. That is, denominator * inv = 1 mod 2^4.
            uint256 inverse = (3 * denominator) ^ 2;

            // Use the Newton-Raphson iteration to improve the precision. Thanks to Hensel's lifting lemma, this also
            // works in modular arithmetic, doubling the correct bits in each step.
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^8
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^16
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^32
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^64
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^128
            inverse *= 2 - denominator * inverse; // inverse mod 2^256

            // Because the division is now exact we can divide by multiplying with the modular inverse of denominator.
            // This will give us the correct result modulo 2^256. Since the preconditions guarantee that the outcome is
            // less than 2^256, this is the final result. We don't need to compute the high bits of the result and prod1
            // is no longer required.
            result = prod0 * inverse;
            return result;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates x * y / denominator with full precision, following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function mulDiv(uint256 x, uint256 y, uint256 denominator, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = mulDiv(x, y, denominator);
        if (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && mulmod(x, y, denominator) > 0) {
            result += 1;
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the square root of a number. If the number is not a perfect square, the value is rounded
     * towards zero.
     *
     * Inspired by Henry S. Warren, Jr.'s "Hacker's Delight" (Chapter 11).
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        if (a == 0) {
            return 0;
        }

        // For our first guess, we get the biggest power of 2 which is smaller than the square root of the target.
        //
        // We know that the "msb" (most significant bit) of our target number `a` is a power of 2 such that we have
        // `msb(a) <= a < 2*msb(a)`. This value can be written `msb(a)=2**k` with `k=log2(a)`.
        //
        // This can be rewritten `2**log2(a) <= a < 2**(log2(a) + 1)`
        // → `sqrt(2**k) <= sqrt(a) < sqrt(2**(k+1))`
        // → `2**(k/2) <= sqrt(a) < 2**((k+1)/2) <= 2**(k/2 + 1)`
        //
        // Consequently, `2**(log2(a) / 2)` is a good first approximation of `sqrt(a)` with at least 1 correct bit.
        uint256 result = 1 << (log2(a) >> 1);

        // At this point `result` is an estimation with one bit of precision. We know the true value is a uint128,
        // since it is the square root of a uint256. Newton's method converges quadratically (precision doubles at
        // every iteration). We thus need at most 7 iteration to turn our partial result with one bit of precision
        // into the expected uint128 result.
        unchecked {
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            result = (result + a / result) >> 1;
            return min(result, a / result);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @notice Calculates sqrt(a), following the selected rounding direction.
     */
    function sqrt(uint256 a, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = sqrt(a);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && result * result < a ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2 of a positive value rounded towards zero.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 128;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                value >>= 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 4 > 0) {
                value >>= 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 2 > 0) {
                value >>= 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 1 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 2, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log2(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log2(value);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && 1 << result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10 of a positive value rounded towards zero.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >= 10 ** 64) {
                value /= 10 ** 64;
                result += 64;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 32) {
                value /= 10 ** 32;
                result += 32;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 16) {
                value /= 10 ** 16;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 8) {
                value /= 10 ** 8;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 4) {
                value /= 10 ** 4;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 2) {
                value /= 10 ** 2;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >= 10 ** 1) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 10, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log10(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log10(value);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && 10 ** result < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256 of a positive value rounded towards zero.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     *
     * Adding one to the result gives the number of pairs of hex symbols needed to represent `value` as a hex string.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        uint256 result = 0;
        unchecked {
            if (value >> 128 > 0) {
                value >>= 128;
                result += 16;
            }
            if (value >> 64 > 0) {
                value >>= 64;
                result += 8;
            }
            if (value >> 32 > 0) {
                value >>= 32;
                result += 4;
            }
            if (value >> 16 > 0) {
                value >>= 16;
                result += 2;
            }
            if (value >> 8 > 0) {
                result += 1;
            }
        }
        return result;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Return the log in base 256, following the selected rounding direction, of a positive value.
     * Returns 0 if given 0.
     */
    function log256(uint256 value, Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 result = log256(value);
            return result + (unsignedRoundsUp(rounding) && 1 << (result << 3) < value ? 1 : 0);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether a provided rounding mode is considered rounding up for unsigned integers.
     */
    function unsignedRoundsUp(Rounding rounding) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return uint8(rounding) % 2 == 1;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/math/SignedMath.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Standard signed math utilities missing in the Solidity language.
 */
library SignedMath {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the largest of two signed numbers.
     */
    function max(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
        return a > b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the smallest of two signed numbers.
     */
    function min(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
        return a < b ? a : b;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the average of two signed numbers without overflow.
     * The result is rounded towards zero.
     */
    function average(int256 a, int256 b) internal pure returns (int256) {
        // Formula from the book "Hacker's Delight"
        int256 x = (a & b) + ((a ^ b) >> 1);
        return x + (int256(uint256(x) >> 255) & (a ^ b));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the absolute unsigned value of a signed value.
     */
    function abs(int256 n) internal pure returns (uint256) {
        unchecked {
            // must be unchecked in order to support `n = type(int256).min`
            return uint256(n >= 0 ? n : -n);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/ReentrancyGuard.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

/**
 * @dev Contract module that helps prevent reentrant calls to a function.
 *
 * Inheriting from `ReentrancyGuard` will make the {nonReentrant} modifier
 * available, which can be applied to functions to make sure there are no nested
 * (reentrant) calls to them.
 *
 * Note that because there is a single `nonReentrant` guard, functions marked as
 * `nonReentrant` may not call one another. This can be worked around by making
 * those functions `private`, and then adding `external` `nonReentrant` entry
 * points to them.
 *
 * TIP: If you would like to learn more about reentrancy and alternative ways
 * to protect against it, check out our blog post
 * https://blog.openzeppelin.com/reentrancy-after-istanbul/[Reentrancy After Istanbul].
 */
abstract contract ReentrancyGuard {
    // Booleans are more expensive than uint256 or any type that takes up a full
    // word because each write operation emits an extra SLOAD to first read the
    // slot's contents, replace the bits taken up by the boolean, and then write
    // back. This is the compiler's defense against contract upgrades and
    // pointer aliasing, and it cannot be disabled.

    // The values being non-zero value makes deployment a bit more expensive,
    // but in exchange the refund on every call to nonReentrant will be lower in
    // amount. Since refunds are capped to a percentage of the total
    // transaction's gas, it is best to keep them low in cases like this one, to
    // increase the likelihood of the full refund coming into effect.
    uint256 private constant NOT_ENTERED = 1;
    uint256 private constant ENTERED = 2;

    uint256 private _status;

    /**
     * @dev Unauthorized reentrant call.
     */
    error ReentrancyGuardReentrantCall();

    constructor() {
        _status = NOT_ENTERED;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Prevents a contract from calling itself, directly or indirectly.
     * Calling a `nonReentrant` function from another `nonReentrant`
     * function is not supported. It is possible to prevent this from happening
     * by making the `nonReentrant` function external, and making it call a
     * `private` function that does the actual work.
     */
    modifier nonReentrant() {
        _nonReentrantBefore();
        _;
        _nonReentrantAfter();
    }

    function _nonReentrantBefore() private {
        // On the first call to nonReentrant, _status will be NOT_ENTERED
        if (_status == ENTERED) {
            revert ReentrancyGuardReentrantCall();
        }

        // Any calls to nonReentrant after this point will fail
        _status = ENTERED;
    }

    function _nonReentrantAfter() private {
        // By storing the original value once again, a refund is triggered (see
        // https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2200)
        _status = NOT_ENTERED;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the reentrancy guard is currently set to "entered", which indicates there is a
     * `nonReentrant` function in the call stack.
     */
    function _reentrancyGuardEntered() internal view returns (bool) {
        return _status == ENTERED;
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// OpenZeppelin Contracts (last updated v5.0.0) (utils/Strings.sol)

pragma solidity ^0.8.20;

import {Math} from "./math/Math.sol";
import {SignedMath} from "./math/SignedMath.sol";

/**
 * @dev String operations.
 */
library Strings {
    bytes16 private constant HEX_DIGITS = "0123456789abcdef";
    uint8 private constant ADDRESS_LENGTH = 20;

    /**
     * @dev The `value` string doesn't fit in the specified `length`.
     */
    error StringsInsufficientHexLength(uint256 value, uint256 length);

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 length = Math.log10(value) + 1;
            string memory buffer = new string(length);
            uint256 ptr;
            /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
            assembly {
                ptr := add(buffer, add(32, length))
            }
            while (true) {
                ptr--;
                /// @solidity memory-safe-assembly
                assembly {
                    mstore8(ptr, byte(mod(value, 10), HEX_DIGITS))
                }
                value /= 10;
                if (value == 0) break;
            }
            return buffer;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `int256` to its ASCII `string` decimal representation.
     */
    function toStringSigned(int256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return string.concat(value < 0 ? "-" : "", toString(SignedMath.abs(value)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        unchecked {
            return toHexString(value, Math.log256(value) + 1);
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a `uint256` to its ASCII `string` hexadecimal representation with fixed length.
     */
    function toHexString(uint256 value, uint256 length) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        uint256 localValue = value;
        bytes memory buffer = new bytes(2 * length + 2);
        buffer[0] = "0";
        buffer[1] = "x";
        for (uint256 i = 2 * length + 1; i > 1; --i) {
            buffer[i] = HEX_DIGITS[localValue & 0xf];
            localValue >>= 4;
        }
        if (localValue != 0) {
            revert StringsInsufficientHexLength(value, length);
        }
        return string(buffer);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts an `address` with fixed length of 20 bytes to its not checksummed ASCII `string` hexadecimal
     * representation.
     */
    function toHexString(address addr) internal pure returns (string memory) {
        return toHexString(uint256(uint160(addr)), ADDRESS_LENGTH);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if the two strings are equal.
     */
    function equal(string memory a, string memory b) internal pure returns (bool) {
        return bytes(a).length == bytes(b).length && keccak256(bytes(a)) == keccak256(bytes(b));
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/access/OwnablePermissions.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/interfaces/ICreatorToken.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/interfaces/ICreatorTokenTransferValidator.sol";
import "@limitbreak/creator-token-standards/src/utils/TransferValidation.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/interfaces/IERC165.sol";

/**
 * @title CreatorTokenBase
 * @author Limit Break, Inc.
 * @notice CreatorTokenBase is an abstract contract that provides basic functionality for managing token
 * transfer policies through an implementation of ICreatorTokenTransferValidator. This contract is intended to be used
 * as a base for creator-specific token contracts, enabling customizable transfer restrictions and security policies.
 *
 * <h4>Features:</h4>
 * <ul>Ownable: This contract can have an owner who can set and update the transfer validator.</ul>
 * <ul>TransferValidation: Implements the basic token transfer validation interface.</ul>
 * <ul>ICreatorToken: Implements the interface for creator tokens, providing view functions for token security policies.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Benefits:</h4>
 * <ul>Provides a flexible and modular way to implement custom token transfer restrictions and security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Allows creators to enforce policies such as whitelisted operators and permitted contract receivers.</ul>
 * <ul>Can be easily integrated into other token contracts as a base contract.</ul>
 *
 * <h4>Intended Usage:</h4>
 * <ul>Use as a base contract for creator token implementations that require advanced transfer restrictions and
 *   security policies.</ul>
 * <ul>Set and update the ICreatorTokenTransferValidator implementation contract to enforce desired policies for the
 *   creator token.</ul>
 */
abstract contract CreatorTokenBase is
    OwnablePermissions,
    TransferValidation,
    ICreatorToken
{
    /**
     * @dev Thrown when the transfer validator address is the zero address
     * @dev or it does not implement the `ICreatorTokenTransferValidator` interface.
     */
    error CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();

    /// @dev Thrown when attempting to set transfer security settings before a transfer validator is set.
    error CreatorTokenBase__SetTransferValidatorFirst();

    /// @dev The default transfer validator address for calls to `setToDefaultSecurityPolicy`.
    address public constant DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR =
        address(0x721C00182a990771244d7A71B9FA2ea789A3b433);

    /// @dev The default transfer security level for calls to `setToDefaultSecurityPolicy`.
    TransferSecurityLevels public constant DEFAULT_TRANSFER_SECURITY_LEVEL =
        TransferSecurityLevels.Two;

    /// @dev The default operator whitelist id for calls to `setToDefaultSecurityPolicy`.
    uint120 public constant DEFAULT_OPERATOR_WHITELIST_ID = uint120(1);

    ICreatorTokenTransferValidator private transferValidator;

    /**
     * @notice Allows the contract owner to set the transfer validator to the official validator contract
     *         and set the security policy to the recommended default settings.
     * @dev    May be overridden to change the default behavior of an individual collection.
     */
    function setToDefaultSecurityPolicy() public virtual {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();
        setTransferValidator(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR);
        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR)
            .setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(
                address(this),
                DEFAULT_TRANSFER_SECURITY_LEVEL
            );
        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(DEFAULT_TRANSFER_VALIDATOR)
            .setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(
                address(this),
                DEFAULT_OPERATOR_WHITELIST_ID
            );
    }

    /**
     * @notice Allows the contract owner to set the transfer validator to a custom validator contract
     *         and set the security policy to their own custom settings.
     */
    function setToCustomValidatorAndSecurityPolicy(
        address validator,
        TransferSecurityLevels level,
        uint120 operatorWhitelistId,
        uint120 permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
    ) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        setTransferValidator(validator);

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(validator)
            .setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(address(this), level);

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(validator)
            .setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(
                address(this),
                operatorWhitelistId
            );

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(validator)
            .setPermittedContractReceiverAllowlistOfCollection(
                address(this),
                permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
            );
    }

    /**
     * @notice Allows the contract owner to set the security policy to their own custom settings.
     * @dev    Reverts if the transfer validator has not been set.
     */
    function setToCustomSecurityPolicy(
        TransferSecurityLevels level,
        uint120 operatorWhitelistId,
        uint120 permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
    ) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        ICreatorTokenTransferValidator validator = getTransferValidator();
        if (address(validator) == address(0)) {
            revert CreatorTokenBase__SetTransferValidatorFirst();
        }

        validator.setTransferSecurityLevelOfCollection(address(this), level);
        validator.setOperatorWhitelistOfCollection(
            address(this),
            operatorWhitelistId
        );
        validator.setPermittedContractReceiverAllowlistOfCollection(
            address(this),
            permittedContractReceiversAllowlistId
        );
    }

    /**
     * @notice Sets the transfer validator for the token contract.
     *
     * @dev    Throws when provided validator contract is not the zero address and doesn't support
     *         the ICreatorTokenTransferValidator interface.
     * @dev    Throws when the caller is not the contract owner.
     *
     * @dev    <h4>Postconditions:</h4>
     *         1. The transferValidator address is updated.
     *         2. The `TransferValidatorUpdated` event is emitted.
     *
     * @param transferValidator_ The address of the transfer validator contract.
     */
    function setTransferValidator(address transferValidator_) public {
        _requireCallerIsContractOwner();

        bool isValidTransferValidator = false;

        if (transferValidator_.code.length > 0) {
            try
                IERC165(transferValidator_).supportsInterface(
                    type(ICreatorTokenTransferValidator).interfaceId
                )
            returns (bool supportsInterface) {
                isValidTransferValidator = supportsInterface;
            } catch {}
        }

        if (transferValidator_ != address(0) && !isValidTransferValidator) {
            revert CreatorTokenBase__InvalidTransferValidatorContract();
        }

        emit TransferValidatorUpdated(
            address(transferValidator),
            transferValidator_
        );

        transferValidator = ICreatorTokenTransferValidator(transferValidator_);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the transfer validator contract address for this token contract.
     */
    function getTransferValidator()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (ICreatorTokenTransferValidator)
    {
        return transferValidator;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the security policy for this token contract, which includes:
     *         Transfer security level, operator whitelist id, permitted contract receiver allowlist id.
     */
    function getSecurityPolicy()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (CollectionSecurityPolicy memory)
    {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return transferValidator.getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this));
        }

        return
            CollectionSecurityPolicy({
                transferSecurityLevel: TransferSecurityLevels.Recommended,
                operatorWhitelistId: 0,
                permittedContractReceiversId: 0
            });
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the list of all whitelisted operators for this token contract.
     * @dev    This can be an expensive call and should only be used in view-only functions.
     */
    function getWhitelistedOperators()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (address[] memory)
    {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.getWhitelistedOperators(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .operatorWhitelistId
                );
        }

        return new address[](0);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Returns the list of permitted contract receivers for this token contract.
     * @dev    This can be an expensive call and should only be used in view-only functions.
     */
    function getPermittedContractReceivers()
        public
        view
        override
        returns (address[] memory)
    {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.getPermittedContractReceivers(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .permittedContractReceiversId
                );
        }

        return new address[](0);
    }

    /**
     * @notice Checks if an operator is whitelisted for this token contract.
     * @param operator The address of the operator to check.
     */
    function isOperatorWhitelisted(
        address operator
    ) public view override returns (bool) {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.isOperatorWhitelisted(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .operatorWhitelistId,
                    operator
                );
        }

        return false;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Checks if a contract receiver is permitted for this token contract.
     * @param receiver The address of the receiver to check.
     */
    function isContractReceiverPermitted(
        address receiver
    ) public view override returns (bool) {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            return
                transferValidator.isContractReceiverPermitted(
                    transferValidator
                        .getCollectionSecurityPolicy(address(this))
                        .permittedContractReceiversId,
                    receiver
                );
        }

        return false;
    }

    /**
     * @notice Determines if a transfer is allowed based on the token contract's security policy.  Use this function
     *         to simulate whether or not a transfer made by the specified `caller` from the `from` address to the `to`
     *         address would be allowed by this token's security policy.
     *
     * @notice This function only checks the security policy restrictions and does not check whether token ownership
     *         or approvals are in place.
     *
     * @param caller The address of the simulated caller.
     * @param from   The address of the sender.
     * @param to     The address of the receiver.
     * @return       True if the transfer is allowed, false otherwise.
     */
    function isTransferAllowed(
        address caller,
        address from,
        address to
    ) public view override returns (bool) {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            try
                transferValidator.applyCollectionTransferPolicy(
                    caller,
                    from,
                    to
                )
            {
                return true;
            } catch {
                return false;
            }
        }
        return true;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Pre-validates a token transfer, reverting if the transfer is not allowed by this token's security policy.
     *      Inheriting contracts are responsible for overriding the _beforeTokenTransfer function, or its equivalent
     *      and calling _validateBeforeTransfer so that checks can be properly applied during token transfers.
     *
     * @dev Throws when the transfer doesn't comply with the collection's transfer policy, if the transferValidator is
     *      set to a non-zero address.
     *
     * @param caller  The address of the caller.
     * @param from    The address of the sender.
     * @param to      The address of the receiver.
     */
    function _preValidateTransfer(
        address caller,
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 /*tokenId*/,
        uint256 /*value*/
    ) internal virtual override {
        if (address(transferValidator) != address(0)) {
            transferValidator.applyCollectionTransferPolicy(caller, from, to);
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "./CreatorTokenBase.sol";
import "erc721a/contracts/extensions/ERC721AQueryable.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721ACQueryable
 */
abstract contract ERC721ACQueryable is ERC721AQueryable, CreatorTokenBase {
    constructor(
        string memory name_,
        string memory symbol_
    ) CreatorTokenBase() ERC721A(name_, symbol_) {}

    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    ) public view virtual override(ERC721A, IERC721A) returns (bool) {
        return
            interfaceId == type(ICreatorToken).interfaceId ||
            ERC721A.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _beforeTokenTransfers hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual override {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity; ) {
            _validateBeforeTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    /// @dev Ties the erc721a _afterTokenTransfer hook to more granular transfer validation logic
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual override {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < quantity; ) {
            _validateAfterTransfer(from, to, startTokenId + i);
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    function _msgSenderERC721A()
        internal
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (address)
    {
        return _msgSender();
    }
}

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/token/common/ERC2981.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/token/ERC20/utils/SafeERC20.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/ReentrancyGuard.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/ECDSA.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MerkleProof.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/SignatureChecker.sol";
import "@openzeppelin/contracts/utils/cryptography/MessageHashUtils.sol";
import "./creator-token-standards/ERC721ACQueryable.sol";
import "./utils/Constants.sol";
import "../magicdrop-types/contracts/IERC721M.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721CM
 *
 * @dev ERC721ACQueryable and ERC721C subclass with MagicEden launchpad features including
 *  - multiple minting stages with time-based auto stage switch
 *  - global and stage wallet-level minting limit
 *  - whitelist using merkle tree
 *  - crossmint support
 *  - anti-botting
 */
contract ERC721CM is IERC721M, ERC721ACQueryable, Ownable, ReentrancyGuard {
    using ECDSA for bytes32;
    using SafeERC20 for IERC20;

    // Whether this contract is mintable.
    bool private _mintable;

    // Specify how long a signature from cosigner is valid for, recommend 300 seconds.
    uint64 private _timestampExpirySeconds;

    // The address of the cosigner server.
    address private _cosigner;

    // The crossmint address. Need to set if using crossmint.
    address private _crossmintAddress;

    // The total mintable supply.
    uint256 internal _maxMintableSupply;

    // Global wallet limit, across all stages.
    uint256 private _globalWalletLimit;

    // Current base URI.
    string private _currentBaseURI;

    // The suffix for the token URL, e.g. ".json".
    string private _tokenURISuffix;

    // The uri for the storefront-level metadata for better indexing. e.g. "ipfs://UyNGgv3jx2HHfBjQX9RnKtxj2xv2xQDtbVXoRi5rJ31234"
    string private _contractURI;

    // Mint stage infomation. See MintStageInfo for details.
    MintStageInfo[] private _mintStages;

    // Minted count per stage per wallet.
    mapping(uint256 => mapping(address => uint32))
        private _stageMintedCountsPerWallet;

    // Minted count per stage.
    mapping(uint256 => uint256) private _stageMintedCounts;

    // Address of ERC-20 token used to pay for minting. If 0 address, use native currency.
    address private _mintCurrency;

    // Total mint fee
    uint256 private _totalMintFee;

    // Fund receiver
    address public immutable FUND_RECEIVER;

    // Authorized minters
    mapping(address => bool) private _authorizedMinters;

    constructor(
        string memory collectionName,
        string memory collectionSymbol,
        string memory tokenURISuffix,
        uint256 maxMintableSupply,
        uint256 globalWalletLimit,
        address cosigner,
        uint64 timestampExpirySeconds,
        address mintCurrency,
        address fundReceiver
    ) Ownable(msg.sender) ERC721ACQueryable(collectionName, collectionSymbol) {
        if (globalWalletLimit > maxMintableSupply)
            revert GlobalWalletLimitOverflow();
        _mintable = true;
        _maxMintableSupply = maxMintableSupply;
        _globalWalletLimit = globalWalletLimit;
        _tokenURISuffix = tokenURISuffix;
        _cosigner = cosigner; // ethers.constants.AddressZero for no cosigning
        _timestampExpirySeconds = timestampExpirySeconds;
        _mintCurrency = mintCurrency;
        FUND_RECEIVER = fundReceiver;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether mintable.
     */
    modifier canMint() {
        if (!_mintable) revert NotMintable();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether it has enough supply for the given qty.
     */
    modifier hasSupply(uint256 qty) {
        if (totalSupply() + qty > _maxMintableSupply) revert NoSupplyLeft();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether the msg sender is authorized to mint.
     */
    modifier onlyAuthorizedMinter() {
        if (_authorizedMinters[_msgSender()] != true) revert NotAuthorized();
        _;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns cosign nonce.
     */
    function getCosignNonce(
        address minter
    ) public view override returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(minter);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets cosigner.
     */
    function setCosigner(address cosigner) external onlyOwner {
        _cosigner = cosigner;
        emit SetCosigner(cosigner);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets expiry in seconds. This timestamp specifies how long a signature from cosigner is valid for.
     */
    function setTimestampExpirySeconds(uint64 expiry) external onlyOwner {
        _timestampExpirySeconds = expiry;
        emit SetTimestampExpirySeconds(expiry);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets crossmint address if using crossmint. This allows the specified address to call `crossmint`.
     */
    function setCrossmintAddress(address crossmintAddress) external onlyOwner {
        _crossmintAddress = crossmintAddress;
        emit SetCrossmintAddress(crossmintAddress);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Add authorized minter. Can only be called by contract owner.
     */
    function addAuthorizedMinter(address minter) external onlyOwner {
        _authorizedMinters[minter] = true;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Remove authorized minter. Can only be called by contract owner.
     */
    function removeAuthorizedMinter(address minter) external onlyOwner {
        _authorizedMinters[minter] = false;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets stages in the format of an array of `MintStageInfo`.
     *
     * Following is an example of launch with two stages. The first stage is exclusive for whitelisted wallets
     * specified by merkle root.
     *    [{
     *      price: 10000000000000000000,
     *      maxStageSupply: 2000,
     *      walletLimit: 1,
     *      merkleRoot: 0x559fadeb887449800b7b320bf1e92d309f329b9641ac238bebdb74e15c0a5218,
     *      startTimeUnixSeconds: 1667768000,
     *      endTimeUnixSeconds: 1667771600,
     *     },
     *     {
     *      price: 20000000000000000000,
     *      maxStageSupply: 3000,
     *      walletLimit: 2,
     *      merkleRoot: 0,
     *      startTimeUnixSeconds: 1667771600,
     *      endTimeUnixSeconds: 1667775200,
     *     }
     * ]
     */
    function setStages(MintStageInfo[] calldata newStages) external onlyOwner {
        delete _mintStages;

        for (uint256 i = 0; i < newStages.length; ) {
            if (i >= 1) {
                if (
                    newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds <
                    newStages[i - 1].endTimeUnixSeconds +
                        _timestampExpirySeconds
                ) {
                    revert InsufficientStageTimeGap();
                }
            }
            _assertValidStartAndEndTimestamp(
                newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds,
                newStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
            );
            _mintStages.push(
                MintStageInfo({
                    price: newStages[i].price,
                    mintFee: newStages[i].mintFee,
                    walletLimit: newStages[i].walletLimit,
                    merkleRoot: newStages[i].merkleRoot,
                    maxStageSupply: newStages[i].maxStageSupply,
                    startTimeUnixSeconds: newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds,
                    endTimeUnixSeconds: newStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
                })
            );
            emit UpdateStage(
                i,
                newStages[i].price,
                newStages[i].mintFee,
                newStages[i].walletLimit,
                newStages[i].merkleRoot,
                newStages[i].maxStageSupply,
                newStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds,
                newStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
            );

            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gets whether mintable.
     */
    function getMintable() external view returns (bool) {
        return _mintable;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets mintable.
     */
    function setMintable(bool mintable) external onlyOwner {
        _mintable = mintable;
        emit SetMintable(mintable);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns number of stages.
     */
    function getNumberStages() external view override returns (uint256) {
        return _mintStages.length;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns maximum mintable supply.
     */
    function getMaxMintableSupply() external view override returns (uint256) {
        return _maxMintableSupply;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets maximum mintable supply.
     *
     * New supply cannot be larger than the old.
     */
    function setMaxMintableSupply(
        uint256 maxMintableSupply
    ) external virtual onlyOwner {
        if (maxMintableSupply > _maxMintableSupply) {
            revert CannotIncreaseMaxMintableSupply();
        }
        _maxMintableSupply = maxMintableSupply;
        emit SetMaxMintableSupply(maxMintableSupply);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns global wallet limit. This is the max number of tokens can be minted by one wallet.
     */
    function getGlobalWalletLimit() external view override returns (uint256) {
        return _globalWalletLimit;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets global wallet limit.
     */
    function setGlobalWalletLimit(
        uint256 globalWalletLimit
    ) external onlyOwner {
        if (globalWalletLimit > _maxMintableSupply)
            revert GlobalWalletLimitOverflow();
        _globalWalletLimit = globalWalletLimit;
        emit SetGlobalWalletLimit(globalWalletLimit);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns number of minted token for a given address.
     */
    function totalMintedByAddress(
        address a
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        return _numberMinted(a);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns info for one stage specified by index (starting from 0).
     */
    function getStageInfo(
        uint256 index
    ) external view override returns (MintStageInfo memory, uint32, uint256) {
        if (index >= _mintStages.length) {
            revert("InvalidStage");
        }
        uint32 walletMinted = _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[index][msg.sender];
        uint256 stageMinted = _stageMintedCounts[index];
        return (_mintStages[index], walletMinted, stageMinted);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns mint currency address.
     */
    function getMintCurrency() external view returns (address) {
        return _mintCurrency;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s).
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function mint(
        uint32 qty,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable virtual nonReentrant {
        _mintInternal(qty, msg.sender, 0, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s) with limit.
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * limit - limit for the given minter
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function mintWithLimit(
        uint32 qty,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable virtual nonReentrant {
        _mintInternal(qty, msg.sender, limit, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s) through crossmint. This function is supposed to be called by crossmint.
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * to - the address to mint tokens to
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function crossmint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable nonReentrant {
        if (_crossmintAddress == address(0)) revert CrossmintAddressNotSet();

        // Check the caller is Crossmint
        if (msg.sender != _crossmintAddress) revert CrossmintOnly();

        _mintInternal(qty, to, 0, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Authorized mints token(s) with limit
     *
     * qty - number of tokens to mint
     * to - the address to mint tokens to
     * limit - limit for the given minter
     * proof - the merkle proof generated on client side. This applies if using whitelist.
     * timestamp - the current timestamp
     * signature - the signature from cosigner if using cosigner.
     */
    function authorizedMint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable onlyAuthorizedMinter {
        _mintInternal(qty, to, limit, proof, timestamp, signature);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Implementation of minting.
     */
    function _mintInternal(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) internal canMint hasSupply(qty) {
        uint64 stageTimestamp = uint64(block.timestamp);
        bool waiveMintFee = false;

        if (_cosigner != address(0)) {
            waiveMintFee = assertValidCosign(
                msg.sender,
                qty,
                timestamp,
                signature
            );
            _assertValidTimestamp(timestamp);
            stageTimestamp = timestamp;
        }

        uint256 activeStage = getActiveStageFromTimestamp(stageTimestamp);
        MintStageInfo memory stage = _mintStages[activeStage];

        uint80 adjustedMintFee = waiveMintFee ? 0 : stage.mintFee;

        // Check value if minting with ETH
        if (
            _mintCurrency == address(0) &&
            msg.value < (stage.price + adjustedMintFee) * qty
        ) revert NotEnoughValue();

        // Check stage supply if applicable
        if (stage.maxStageSupply > 0) {
            if (_stageMintedCounts[activeStage] + qty > stage.maxStageSupply)
                revert StageSupplyExceeded();
        }

        // Check global wallet limit if applicable
        if (_globalWalletLimit > 0) {
            if (_numberMinted(to) + qty > _globalWalletLimit)
                revert WalletGlobalLimitExceeded();
        }

        // Check wallet limit for stage if applicable, limit == 0 means no limit enforced
        if (stage.walletLimit > 0) {
            if (
                _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[activeStage][to] + qty >
                stage.walletLimit
            ) revert WalletStageLimitExceeded();
        }

        // Check merkle proof if applicable, merkleRoot == 0x00...00 means no proof required
        if (stage.merkleRoot != 0) {
            if (
                MerkleProof.processProof(
                    proof,
                    keccak256(abi.encodePacked(to, limit))
                ) != stage.merkleRoot
            ) revert InvalidProof();

            // Verify merkle proof mint limit
            if (
                limit > 0 &&
                _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[activeStage][to] + qty > limit
            ) {
                revert WalletStageLimitExceeded();
            }
        }

        if (_mintCurrency != address(0)) {
            IERC20(_mintCurrency).safeTransferFrom(
                msg.sender,
                address(this),
                (stage.price + adjustedMintFee) * qty
            );
        }

        _totalMintFee += adjustedMintFee * qty;

        _stageMintedCountsPerWallet[activeStage][to] += qty;
        _stageMintedCounts[activeStage] += qty;
        _safeMint(to, qty);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints token(s) by owner.
     *
     * NOTE: This function bypasses validations thus only available for owner.
     * This is typically used for owner to  pre-mint or mint the remaining of the supply.
     */
    function ownerMint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to
    ) external onlyOwner hasSupply(qty) {
        _safeMint(to, qty);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Withdraws funds by owner.
     */
    function withdraw() external onlyOwner {
        (bool success, ) = MINT_FEE_RECEIVER.call{value: _totalMintFee}("");
        if (!success) revert TransferFailed();
        _totalMintFee = 0;

        uint256 remainingValue = address(this).balance;
        (success, ) = FUND_RECEIVER.call{value: remainingValue}("");
        if (!success) revert WithdrawFailed();

        emit Withdraw(_totalMintFee + remainingValue);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Withdraws ERC-20 funds by owner.
     */
    function withdrawERC20() external onlyOwner {
        if (_mintCurrency == address(0)) revert WrongMintCurrency();

        IERC20(_mintCurrency).safeTransfer(MINT_FEE_RECEIVER, _totalMintFee);
        _totalMintFee = 0;

        uint256 remaining = IERC20(_mintCurrency).balanceOf(address(this));
        IERC20(_mintCurrency).safeTransfer(FUND_RECEIVER, remaining);

        emit WithdrawERC20(_mintCurrency, _totalMintFee + remaining);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets token base URI.
     */
    function setBaseURI(string calldata baseURI) external onlyOwner {
        _currentBaseURI = baseURI;
        emit SetBaseURI(baseURI);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Sets token URI suffix. e.g. ".json".
     */
    function setTokenURISuffix(string calldata suffix) external onlyOwner {
        _tokenURISuffix = suffix;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns token URI for a given token id.
     */
    function tokenURI(
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public view override(ERC721A, IERC721A) returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

        string memory baseURI = _currentBaseURI;
        return
            bytes(baseURI).length != 0
                ? string(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        baseURI,
                        _toString(tokenId),
                        _tokenURISuffix
                    )
                )
                : "";
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns URI for the collection-level metadata.
     */
    function contractURI() public view returns (string memory) {
        return _contractURI;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Set the URI for the collection-level metadata.
     */
    function setContractURI(string calldata uri) external onlyOwner {
        _contractURI = uri;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns data hash for the given minter, qty, waiveMintFee and timestamp.
     */
    function getCosignDigest(
        address minter,
        uint32 qty,
        bool waiveMintFee,
        uint64 timestamp
    ) public view returns (bytes32) {
        if (_cosigner == address(0)) revert CosignerNotSet();
        return
            MessageHashUtils.toEthSignedMessageHash(
                keccak256(
                    abi.encodePacked(
                        address(this),
                        minter,
                        qty,
                        waiveMintFee,
                        _cosigner,
                        timestamp,
                        _chainID(),
                        getCosignNonce(minter)
                    )
                )
            );
    }

    /**
     * @dev Validates the the given signature. Returns whether mint fee is waived.
     */
    function assertValidCosign(
        address minter,
        uint32 qty,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes memory signature
    ) public view returns (bool) {
        if (
            SignatureChecker.isValidSignatureNow(
                _cosigner,
                getCosignDigest(
                    minter,
                    qty,
                    /* waiveMintFee= */ true,
                    timestamp
                ),
                signature
            )
        ) {
            return true;
        }

        if (
            SignatureChecker.isValidSignatureNow(
                _cosigner,
                getCosignDigest(
                    minter,
                    qty,
                    /* waiveMintFee= */ false,
                    timestamp
                ),
                signature
            )
        ) {
            return false;
        }

        revert InvalidCosignSignature();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the current active stage based on timestamp.
     */
    function getActiveStageFromTimestamp(
        uint64 timestamp
    ) public view returns (uint256) {
        for (uint256 i = 0; i < _mintStages.length; ) {
            if (
                timestamp >= _mintStages[i].startTimeUnixSeconds &&
                timestamp < _mintStages[i].endTimeUnixSeconds
            ) {
                return i;
            }
            unchecked {
                ++i;
            }
        }
        revert InvalidStage();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Validates the timestamp is not expired.
     */
    function _assertValidTimestamp(uint64 timestamp) internal view {
        if (timestamp < block.timestamp - _timestampExpirySeconds)
            revert TimestampExpired();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Validates the start timestamp is before end timestamp. Used when updating stages.
     */
    function _assertValidStartAndEndTimestamp(
        uint64 start,
        uint64 end
    ) internal pure {
        if (start >= end) revert InvalidStartAndEndTimestamp();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns chain id.
     */
    function _chainID() private view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 chainID;
        assembly {
            chainID := chainid()
        }
        return chainID;
    }

    function _requireCallerIsContractOwner() internal view virtual override {
        _checkOwner();
    }
}

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import {ERC2981, UpdatableRoyalties} from "./royalties/UpdatableRoyalties.sol";
import {ERC721CM, ERC721ACQueryable, IERC721A} from "./ERC721CM.sol";

/**
 * @title ERC721CMRoyalties
 */
contract ERC721CMRoyalties is ERC721CM, UpdatableRoyalties {
    constructor(
        string memory collectionName,
        string memory collectionSymbol,
        string memory tokenURISuffix,
        uint256 maxMintableSupply,
        uint256 globalWalletLimit,
        address cosigner,
        uint64 timestampExpirySeconds,
        address mintCurrency,
        address fundReceiver,
        address royaltyReceiver,
        uint96 royaltyFeeNumerator
    )
        ERC721CM(
            collectionName,
            collectionSymbol,
            tokenURISuffix,
            maxMintableSupply,
            globalWalletLimit,
            cosigner,
            timestampExpirySeconds,
            mintCurrency,
            fundReceiver
        )
        UpdatableRoyalties(royaltyReceiver, royaltyFeeNumerator)
    {}

    function supportsInterface(
        bytes4 interfaceId
    )
        public
        view
        virtual
        override(ERC2981, ERC721ACQueryable, IERC721A)
        returns (bool)
    {
        return
            ERC721ACQueryable.supportsInterface(interfaceId) ||
            ERC2981.supportsInterface(interfaceId);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import {Ownable} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/access/Ownable.sol";
import {ERC2981} from "@openzeppelin/contracts/token/common/ERC2981.sol";

/**
 * @title BasicRoyaltiesBase
 */
abstract contract UpdatableRoyalties is ERC2981, Ownable {
    event DefaultRoyaltySet(address indexed receiver, uint96 feeNumerator);
    event TokenRoyaltySet(
        uint256 indexed tokenId,
        address indexed receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    );

    constructor(address receiver, uint96 feeNumerator) {
        _setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    function setDefaultRoyalty(
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) public onlyOwner {
        super._setDefaultRoyalty(receiver, feeNumerator);
        emit DefaultRoyaltySet(receiver, feeNumerator);
    }

    function setTokenRoyalty(
        uint256 tokenId,
        address receiver,
        uint96 feeNumerator
    ) public onlyOwner {
        super._setTokenRoyalty(tokenId, receiver, feeNumerator);
        emit TokenRoyaltySet(tokenId, receiver, feeNumerator);
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

address constant CANONICAL_OPERATOR_FILTER_REGISTRY_ADDRESS = 0x000000000000AAeB6D7670E522A718067333cd4E;
address constant ME_SUBSCRIPTION = 0x0403c10721Ff2936EfF684Bbb57CD792Fd4b1B6c;

address constant MINT_FEE_RECEIVER = 0x0B98151bEdeE73f9Ba5F2C7b72dEa02D38Ce49Fc;

uint64 constant TIMESTAMP_EXPIRY_SECONDS = 300;

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721A.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721 token receiver.
 */
interface ERC721A__IERC721Receiver {
    function onERC721Received(
        address operator,
        address from,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external returns (bytes4);
}

/**
 * @title ERC721A
 *
 * @dev Implementation of the [ERC721](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-721)
 * Non-Fungible Token Standard, including the Metadata extension.
 * Optimized for lower gas during batch mints.
 *
 * Token IDs are minted in sequential order (e.g. 0, 1, 2, 3, ...)
 * starting from `_startTokenId()`.
 *
 * Assumptions:
 *
 * - An owner cannot have more than 2**64 - 1 (max value of uint64) of supply.
 * - The maximum token ID cannot exceed 2**256 - 1 (max value of uint256).
 */
contract ERC721A is IERC721A {
    // Bypass for a `--via-ir` bug (https://github.com/chiru-labs/ERC721A/pull/364).
    struct TokenApprovalRef {
        address value;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                           CONSTANTS
    // =============================================================

    // Mask of an entry in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY = (1 << 64) - 1;

    // The bit position of `numberMinted` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED = 64;

    // The bit position of `numberBurned` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED = 128;

    // The bit position of `aux` in packed address data.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_AUX = 192;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in packed address data except the 64 bits for `aux`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 192) - 1;

    // The bit position of `startTimestamp` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP = 160;

    // The bit mask of the `burned` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_BURNED = 1 << 224;

    // The bit position of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 225;

    // The bit mask of the `nextInitialized` bit in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED = 1 << 225;

    // The bit position of `extraData` in packed ownership.
    uint256 private constant _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA = 232;

    // Mask of all 256 bits in a packed ownership except the 24 bits for `extraData`.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT = (1 << 232) - 1;

    // The mask of the lower 160 bits for addresses.
    uint256 private constant _BITMASK_ADDRESS = (1 << 160) - 1;

    // The maximum `quantity` that can be minted with {_mintERC2309}.
    // This limit is to prevent overflows on the address data entries.
    // For a limit of 5000, a total of 3.689e15 calls to {_mintERC2309}
    // is required to cause an overflow, which is unrealistic.
    uint256 private constant _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT = 5000;

    // The `Transfer` event signature is given by:
    // `keccak256(bytes("Transfer(address,address,uint256)"))`.
    bytes32 private constant _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE =
        0xddf252ad1be2c89b69c2b068fc378daa952ba7f163c4a11628f55a4df523b3ef;

    // =============================================================
    //                            STORAGE
    // =============================================================

    // The next token ID to be minted.
    uint256 private _currentIndex;

    // The number of tokens burned.
    uint256 private _burnCounter;

    // Token name
    string private _name;

    // Token symbol
    string private _symbol;

    // Mapping from token ID to ownership details
    // An empty struct value does not necessarily mean the token is unowned.
    // See {_packedOwnershipOf} implementation for details.
    //
    // Bits Layout:
    // - [0..159]   `addr`
    // - [160..223] `startTimestamp`
    // - [224]      `burned`
    // - [225]      `nextInitialized`
    // - [232..255] `extraData`
    mapping(uint256 => uint256) private _packedOwnerships;

    // Mapping owner address to address data.
    //
    // Bits Layout:
    // - [0..63]    `balance`
    // - [64..127]  `numberMinted`
    // - [128..191] `numberBurned`
    // - [192..255] `aux`
    mapping(address => uint256) private _packedAddressData;

    // Mapping from token ID to approved address.
    mapping(uint256 => TokenApprovalRef) private _tokenApprovals;

    // Mapping from owner to operator approvals
    mapping(address => mapping(address => bool)) private _operatorApprovals;

    // =============================================================
    //                          CONSTRUCTOR
    // =============================================================

    constructor(string memory name_, string memory symbol_) {
        _name = name_;
        _symbol = symbol_;
        _currentIndex = _startTokenId();
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                   TOKEN COUNTING OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the starting token ID.
     * To change the starting token ID, please override this function.
     */
    function _startTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return 0;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next token ID to be minted.
     */
    function _nextTokenId() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return _currentIndex;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as _burnCounter cannot be incremented
        // more than `_currentIndex - _startTokenId()` times.
        unchecked {
            return _currentIndex - _burnCounter - _startTokenId();
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total amount of tokens minted in the contract.
     */
    function _totalMinted() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        // Counter underflow is impossible as `_currentIndex` does not decrement,
        // and it is initialized to `_startTokenId()`.
        unchecked {
            return _currentIndex - _startTokenId();
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens burned.
     */
    function _totalBurned() internal view virtual returns (uint256) {
        return _burnCounter;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                    ADDRESS DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) public view virtual override returns (uint256) {
        if (owner == address(0)) revert BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();
        return _packedAddressData[owner] & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens minted by `owner`.
     */
    function _numberMinted(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return (_packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the number of tokens burned by or on behalf of `owner`.
     */
    function _numberBurned(address owner) internal view returns (uint256) {
        return (_packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) & _BITMASK_ADDRESS_DATA_ENTRY;
    }

    /**
     * Returns the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     */
    function _getAux(address owner) internal view returns (uint64) {
        return uint64(_packedAddressData[owner] >> _BITPOS_AUX);
    }

    /**
     * Sets the auxiliary data for `owner`. (e.g. number of whitelist mint slots used).
     * If there are multiple variables, please pack them into a uint64.
     */
    function _setAux(address owner, uint64 aux) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = _packedAddressData[owner];
        uint256 auxCasted;
        // Cast `aux` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            auxCasted := aux
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_AUX_COMPLEMENT) | (auxCasted << _BITPOS_AUX);
        _packedAddressData[owner] = packed;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        // The interface IDs are constants representing the first 4 bytes
        // of the XOR of all function selectors in the interface.
        // See: [ERC165](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165)
        // (e.g. `bytes4(i.functionA.selector ^ i.functionB.selector ^ ...)`)
        return
            interfaceId == 0x01ffc9a7 || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC165.
            interfaceId == 0x80ac58cd || // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721.
            interfaceId == 0x5b5e139f; // ERC165 interface ID for ERC721Metadata.
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _name;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        return _symbol;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (string memory) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

        string memory baseURI = _baseURI();
        return bytes(baseURI).length != 0 ? string(abi.encodePacked(baseURI, _toString(tokenId))) : '';
    }

    /**
     * @dev Base URI for computing {tokenURI}. If set, the resulting URI for each
     * token will be the concatenation of the `baseURI` and the `tokenId`. Empty
     * by default, it can be overridden in child contracts.
     */
    function _baseURI() internal view virtual returns (string memory) {
        return '';
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     OWNERSHIPS OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        return address(uint160(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId)));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Gas spent here starts off proportional to the maximum mint batch size.
     * It gradually moves to O(1) as tokens get transferred around over time.
     */
    function _ownershipOf(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnershipOf(tokenId));
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct at `index`.
     */
    function _ownershipAt(uint256 index) internal view virtual returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        return _unpackedOwnership(_packedOwnerships[index]);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Initializes the ownership slot minted at `index` for efficiency purposes.
     */
    function _initializeOwnershipAt(uint256 index) internal virtual {
        if (_packedOwnerships[index] == 0) {
            _packedOwnerships[index] = _packedOwnershipOf(index);
        }
    }

    /**
     * Returns the packed ownership data of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _packedOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint256 curr = tokenId;

        unchecked {
            if (_startTokenId() <= curr)
                if (curr < _currentIndex) {
                    uint256 packed = _packedOwnerships[curr];
                    // If not burned.
                    if (packed & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0) {
                        // Invariant:
                        // There will always be an initialized ownership slot
                        // (i.e. `ownership.addr != address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                        // before an unintialized ownership slot
                        // (i.e. `ownership.addr == address(0) && ownership.burned == false`)
                        // Hence, `curr` will not underflow.
                        //
                        // We can directly compare the packed value.
                        // If the address is zero, packed will be zero.
                        while (packed == 0) {
                            packed = _packedOwnerships[--curr];
                        }
                        return packed;
                    }
                }
        }
        revert OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the unpacked `TokenOwnership` struct from `packed`.
     */
    function _unpackedOwnership(uint256 packed) private pure returns (TokenOwnership memory ownership) {
        ownership.addr = address(uint160(packed));
        ownership.startTimestamp = uint64(packed >> _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP);
        ownership.burned = packed & _BITMASK_BURNED != 0;
        ownership.extraData = uint24(packed >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Packs ownership data into a single uint256.
     */
    function _packOwnershipData(address owner, uint256 flags) private view returns (uint256 result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `owner | (block.timestamp << _BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP) | flags`.
            result := or(owner, or(shl(_BITPOS_START_TIMESTAMP, timestamp()), flags))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `nextInitialized` flag set if `quantity` equals 1.
     */
    function _nextInitializedFlag(uint256 quantity) private pure returns (uint256 result) {
        // For branchless setting of the `nextInitialized` flag.
        assembly {
            // `(quantity == 1) << _BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED`.
            result := shl(_BITPOS_NEXT_INITIALIZED, eq(quantity, 1))
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      APPROVAL OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) public payable virtual override {
        address owner = ownerOf(tokenId);

        if (_msgSenderERC721A() != owner)
            if (!isApprovedForAll(owner, _msgSenderERC721A())) {
                revert ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
            }

        _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value = to;
        emit Approval(owner, to, tokenId);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (address) {
        if (!_exists(tokenId)) revert ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();

        return _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool approved) public virtual override {
        _operatorApprovals[_msgSenderERC721A()][operator] = approved;
        emit ApprovalForAll(_msgSenderERC721A(), operator, approved);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) public view virtual override returns (bool) {
        return _operatorApprovals[owner][operator];
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `tokenId` exists.
     *
     * Tokens can be managed by their owner or approved accounts via {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Tokens start existing when they are minted. See {_mint}.
     */
    function _exists(uint256 tokenId) internal view virtual returns (bool) {
        return
            _startTokenId() <= tokenId &&
            tokenId < _currentIndex && // If within bounds,
            _packedOwnerships[tokenId] & _BITMASK_BURNED == 0; // and not burned.
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns whether `msgSender` is equal to `approvedAddress` or `owner`.
     */
    function _isSenderApprovedOrOwner(
        address approvedAddress,
        address owner,
        address msgSender
    ) private pure returns (bool result) {
        assembly {
            // Mask `owner` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            owner := and(owner, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // Mask `msgSender` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
            msgSender := and(msgSender, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
            // `msgSender == owner || msgSender == approvedAddress`.
            result := or(eq(msgSender, owner), eq(msgSender, approvedAddress))
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns the storage slot and value for the approved address of `tokenId`.
     */
    function _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(uint256 tokenId)
        private
        view
        returns (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress)
    {
        TokenApprovalRef storage tokenApproval = _tokenApprovals[tokenId];
        // The following is equivalent to `approvedAddress = _tokenApprovals[tokenId].value`.
        assembly {
            approvedAddressSlot := tokenApproval.slot
            approvedAddress := sload(approvedAddressSlot)
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                      TRANSFER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        if (address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked)) != from) revert TransferFromIncorrectOwner();

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
        if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
            if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

        if (to == address(0)) revert TransferToZeroAddress();

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // We can directly increment and decrement the balances.
            --_packedAddressData[from]; // Updates: `balance -= 1`.
            ++_packedAddressData[to]; // Updates: `balance += 1`.

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the next owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of transfering.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            _packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED | _nextExtraData(from, to, prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (_packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        _packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        emit Transfer(from, to, tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, to, tokenId, 1);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) public payable virtual override {
        safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '');
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) public payable virtual override {
        transferFrom(from, to, tokenId);
        if (to.code.length != 0)
            if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(from, to, tokenId, _data)) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called before a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * are about to be transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called before burning one token.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _beforeTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Hook that is called after a set of serially-ordered token IDs
     * have been transferred. This includes minting.
     * And also called after one token has been burned.
     *
     * `startTokenId` - the first token ID to be transferred.
     * `quantity` - the amount to be transferred.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` has been
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` has been minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` has been burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _afterTokenTransfers(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 startTokenId,
        uint256 quantity
    ) internal virtual {}

    /**
     * @dev Private function to invoke {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received} on a target contract.
     *
     * `from` - Previous owner of the given token ID.
     * `to` - Target address that will receive the token.
     * `tokenId` - Token ID to be transferred.
     * `_data` - Optional data to send along with the call.
     *
     * Returns whether the call correctly returned the expected magic value.
     */
    function _checkContractOnERC721Received(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes memory _data
    ) private returns (bool) {
        try ERC721A__IERC721Receiver(to).onERC721Received(_msgSenderERC721A(), from, tokenId, _data) returns (
            bytes4 retval
        ) {
            return retval == ERC721A__IERC721Receiver(to).onERC721Received.selector;
        } catch (bytes memory reason) {
            if (reason.length == 0) {
                revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
            } else {
                assembly {
                    revert(add(32, reason), mload(reason))
                }
            }
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        MINT OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _mint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are incredibly unrealistic.
        // `balance` and `numberMinted` have a maximum limit of 2**64.
        // `tokenId` has a maximum limit of 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            _packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            _packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            uint256 toMasked;
            uint256 end = startTokenId + quantity;

            // Use assembly to loop and emit the `Transfer` event for gas savings.
            // The duplicated `log4` removes an extra check and reduces stack juggling.
            // The assembly, together with the surrounding Solidity code, have been
            // delicately arranged to nudge the compiler into producing optimized opcodes.
            assembly {
                // Mask `to` to the lower 160 bits, in case the upper bits somehow aren't clean.
                toMasked := and(to, _BITMASK_ADDRESS)
                // Emit the `Transfer` event.
                log4(
                    0, // Start of data (0, since no data).
                    0, // End of data (0, since no data).
                    _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, // Signature.
                    0, // `address(0)`.
                    toMasked, // `to`.
                    startTokenId // `tokenId`.
                )

                // The `iszero(eq(,))` check ensures that large values of `quantity`
                // that overflows uint256 will make the loop run out of gas.
                // The compiler will optimize the `iszero` away for performance.
                for {
                    let tokenId := add(startTokenId, 1)
                } iszero(eq(tokenId, end)) {
                    tokenId := add(tokenId, 1)
                } {
                    // Emit the `Transfer` event. Similar to above.
                    log4(0, 0, _TRANSFER_EVENT_SIGNATURE, 0, toMasked, tokenId)
                }
            }
            if (toMasked == 0) revert MintToZeroAddress();

            _currentIndex = end;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * This function is intended for efficient minting only during contract creation.
     *
     * It emits only one {ConsecutiveTransfer} as defined in
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309),
     * instead of a sequence of {Transfer} event(s).
     *
     * Calling this function outside of contract creation WILL make your contract
     * non-compliant with the ERC721 standard.
     * For full ERC721 compliance, substituting ERC721 {Transfer} event(s) with the ERC2309
     * {ConsecutiveTransfer} event is only permissible during contract creation.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * Emits a {ConsecutiveTransfer} event.
     */
    function _mintERC2309(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        uint256 startTokenId = _currentIndex;
        if (to == address(0)) revert MintToZeroAddress();
        if (quantity == 0) revert MintZeroQuantity();
        if (quantity > _MAX_MINT_ERC2309_QUANTITY_LIMIT) revert MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();

        _beforeTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);

        // Overflows are unrealistic due to the above check for `quantity` to be below the limit.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance += quantity`.
            // - `numberMinted += quantity`.
            //
            // We can directly add to the `balance` and `numberMinted`.
            _packedAddressData[to] += quantity * ((1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_MINTED) | 1);

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of minting.
            // - `burned` to `false`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `quantity == 1`.
            _packedOwnerships[startTokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                to,
                _nextInitializedFlag(quantity) | _nextExtraData(address(0), to, 0)
            );

            emit ConsecutiveTransfer(startTokenId, startTokenId + quantity - 1, address(0), to);

            _currentIndex = startTokenId + quantity;
        }
        _afterTokenTransfers(address(0), to, startTokenId, quantity);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Safely mints `quantity` tokens and transfers them to `to`.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called for each safe transfer.
     * - `quantity` must be greater than 0.
     *
     * See {_mint}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event for each mint.
     */
    function _safeMint(
        address to,
        uint256 quantity,
        bytes memory _data
    ) internal virtual {
        _mint(to, quantity);

        unchecked {
            if (to.code.length != 0) {
                uint256 end = _currentIndex;
                uint256 index = end - quantity;
                do {
                    if (!_checkContractOnERC721Received(address(0), to, index++, _data)) {
                        revert TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();
                    }
                } while (index < end);
                // Reentrancy protection.
                if (_currentIndex != end) revert();
            }
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_safeMint(to, quantity, '')`.
     */
    function _safeMint(address to, uint256 quantity) internal virtual {
        _safeMint(to, quantity, '');
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                        BURN OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `_burn(tokenId, false)`.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId) internal virtual {
        _burn(tokenId, false);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Destroys `tokenId`.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is burned.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function _burn(uint256 tokenId, bool approvalCheck) internal virtual {
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked = _packedOwnershipOf(tokenId);

        address from = address(uint160(prevOwnershipPacked));

        (uint256 approvedAddressSlot, address approvedAddress) = _getApprovedSlotAndAddress(tokenId);

        if (approvalCheck) {
            // The nested ifs save around 20+ gas over a compound boolean condition.
            if (!_isSenderApprovedOrOwner(approvedAddress, from, _msgSenderERC721A()))
                if (!isApprovedForAll(from, _msgSenderERC721A())) revert TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();
        }

        _beforeTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Clear approvals from the previous owner.
        assembly {
            if approvedAddress {
                // This is equivalent to `delete _tokenApprovals[tokenId]`.
                sstore(approvedAddressSlot, 0)
            }
        }

        // Underflow of the sender's balance is impossible because we check for
        // ownership above and the recipient's balance can't realistically overflow.
        // Counter overflow is incredibly unrealistic as `tokenId` would have to be 2**256.
        unchecked {
            // Updates:
            // - `balance -= 1`.
            // - `numberBurned += 1`.
            //
            // We can directly decrement the balance, and increment the number burned.
            // This is equivalent to `packed -= 1; packed += 1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED;`.
            _packedAddressData[from] += (1 << _BITPOS_NUMBER_BURNED) - 1;

            // Updates:
            // - `address` to the last owner.
            // - `startTimestamp` to the timestamp of burning.
            // - `burned` to `true`.
            // - `nextInitialized` to `true`.
            _packedOwnerships[tokenId] = _packOwnershipData(
                from,
                (_BITMASK_BURNED | _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED) | _nextExtraData(from, address(0), prevOwnershipPacked)
            );

            // If the next slot may not have been initialized (i.e. `nextInitialized == false`) .
            if (prevOwnershipPacked & _BITMASK_NEXT_INITIALIZED == 0) {
                uint256 nextTokenId = tokenId + 1;
                // If the next slot's address is zero and not burned (i.e. packed value is zero).
                if (_packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] == 0) {
                    // If the next slot is within bounds.
                    if (nextTokenId != _currentIndex) {
                        // Initialize the next slot to maintain correctness for `ownerOf(tokenId + 1)`.
                        _packedOwnerships[nextTokenId] = prevOwnershipPacked;
                    }
                }
            }
        }

        emit Transfer(from, address(0), tokenId);
        _afterTokenTransfers(from, address(0), tokenId, 1);

        // Overflow not possible, as _burnCounter cannot be exceed _currentIndex times.
        unchecked {
            _burnCounter++;
        }
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                     EXTRA DATA OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Directly sets the extra data for the ownership data `index`.
     */
    function _setExtraDataAt(uint256 index, uint24 extraData) internal virtual {
        uint256 packed = _packedOwnerships[index];
        if (packed == 0) revert OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();
        uint256 extraDataCasted;
        // Cast `extraData` with assembly to avoid redundant masking.
        assembly {
            extraDataCasted := extraData
        }
        packed = (packed & _BITMASK_EXTRA_DATA_COMPLEMENT) | (extraDataCasted << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        _packedOwnerships[index] = packed;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Called during each token transfer to set the 24bit `extraData` field.
     * Intended to be overridden by the cosumer contract.
     *
     * `previousExtraData` - the value of `extraData` before transfer.
     *
     * Calling conditions:
     *
     * - When `from` and `to` are both non-zero, `from`'s `tokenId` will be
     * transferred to `to`.
     * - When `from` is zero, `tokenId` will be minted for `to`.
     * - When `to` is zero, `tokenId` will be burned by `from`.
     * - `from` and `to` are never both zero.
     */
    function _extraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint24 previousExtraData
    ) internal view virtual returns (uint24) {}

    /**
     * @dev Returns the next extra data for the packed ownership data.
     * The returned result is shifted into position.
     */
    function _nextExtraData(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 prevOwnershipPacked
    ) private view returns (uint256) {
        uint24 extraData = uint24(prevOwnershipPacked >> _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA);
        return uint256(_extraData(from, to, extraData)) << _BITPOS_EXTRA_DATA;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                       OTHER OPERATIONS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the message sender (defaults to `msg.sender`).
     *
     * If you are writing GSN compatible contracts, you need to override this function.
     */
    function _msgSenderERC721A() internal view virtual returns (address) {
        return msg.sender;
    }

    /**
     * @dev Converts a uint256 to its ASCII string decimal representation.
     */
    function _toString(uint256 value) internal pure virtual returns (string memory str) {
        assembly {
            // The maximum value of a uint256 contains 78 digits (1 byte per digit), but
            // we allocate 0xa0 bytes to keep the free memory pointer 32-byte word aligned.
            // We will need 1 word for the trailing zeros padding, 1 word for the length,
            // and 3 words for a maximum of 78 digits. Total: 5 * 0x20 = 0xa0.
            let m := add(mload(0x40), 0xa0)
            // Update the free memory pointer to allocate.
            mstore(0x40, m)
            // Assign the `str` to the end.
            str := sub(m, 0x20)
            // Zeroize the slot after the string.
            mstore(str, 0)

            // Cache the end of the memory to calculate the length later.
            let end := str

            // We write the string from rightmost digit to leftmost digit.
            // The following is essentially a do-while loop that also handles the zero case.
            // prettier-ignore
            for { let temp := value } 1 {} {
                str := sub(str, 1)
                // Write the character to the pointer.
                // The ASCII index of the '0' character is 48.
                mstore8(str, add(48, mod(temp, 10)))
                // Keep dividing `temp` until zero.
                temp := div(temp, 10)
                // prettier-ignore
                if iszero(temp) { break }
            }

            let length := sub(end, str)
            // Move the pointer 32 bytes leftwards to make room for the length.
            str := sub(str, 0x20)
            // Store the length.
            mstore(str, length)
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import './IERC721AQueryable.sol';
import '../ERC721A.sol';

/**
 * @title ERC721AQueryable.
 *
 * @dev ERC721A subclass with convenience query functions.
 */
abstract contract ERC721AQueryable is ERC721A, IERC721AQueryable {
    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) public view virtual override returns (TokenOwnership memory) {
        TokenOwnership memory ownership;
        if (tokenId < _startTokenId() || tokenId >= _nextTokenId()) {
            return ownership;
        }
        ownership = _ownershipAt(tokenId);
        if (ownership.burned) {
            return ownership;
        }
        return _ownershipOf(tokenId);
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] calldata tokenIds)
        external
        view
        virtual
        override
        returns (TokenOwnership[] memory)
    {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = tokenIds.length;
            TokenOwnership[] memory ownerships = new TokenOwnership[](tokenIdsLength);
            for (uint256 i; i != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownerships[i] = explicitOwnershipOf(tokenIds[i]);
            }
            return ownerships;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            if (start >= stop) revert InvalidQueryRange();
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            uint256 stopLimit = _nextTokenId();
            // Set `start = max(start, _startTokenId())`.
            if (start < _startTokenId()) {
                start = _startTokenId();
            }
            // Set `stop = min(stop, stopLimit)`.
            if (stop > stopLimit) {
                stop = stopLimit;
            }
            uint256 tokenIdsMaxLength = balanceOf(owner);
            // Set `tokenIdsMaxLength = min(balanceOf(owner), stop - start)`,
            // to cater for cases where `balanceOf(owner)` is too big.
            if (start < stop) {
                uint256 rangeLength = stop - start;
                if (rangeLength < tokenIdsMaxLength) {
                    tokenIdsMaxLength = rangeLength;
                }
            } else {
                tokenIdsMaxLength = 0;
            }
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsMaxLength);
            if (tokenIdsMaxLength == 0) {
                return tokenIds;
            }
            // We need to call `explicitOwnershipOf(start)`,
            // because the slot at `start` may not be initialized.
            TokenOwnership memory ownership = explicitOwnershipOf(start);
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            // If the starting slot exists (i.e. not burned), initialize `currOwnershipAddr`.
            // `ownership.address` will not be zero, as `start` is clamped to the valid token ID range.
            if (!ownership.burned) {
                currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
            }
            for (uint256 i = start; i != stop && tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsMaxLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            // Downsize the array to fit.
            assembly {
                mstore(tokenIds, tokenIdsIdx)
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view virtual override returns (uint256[] memory) {
        unchecked {
            uint256 tokenIdsIdx;
            address currOwnershipAddr;
            uint256 tokenIdsLength = balanceOf(owner);
            uint256[] memory tokenIds = new uint256[](tokenIdsLength);
            TokenOwnership memory ownership;
            for (uint256 i = _startTokenId(); tokenIdsIdx != tokenIdsLength; ++i) {
                ownership = _ownershipAt(i);
                if (ownership.burned) {
                    continue;
                }
                if (ownership.addr != address(0)) {
                    currOwnershipAddr = ownership.addr;
                }
                if (currOwnershipAddr == owner) {
                    tokenIds[tokenIdsIdx++] = i;
                }
            }
            return tokenIds;
        }
    }
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import '../IERC721A.sol';

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721AQueryable.
 */
interface IERC721AQueryable is IERC721A {
    /**
     * Invalid query range (`start` >= `stop`).
     */
    error InvalidQueryRange();

    /**
     * @dev Returns the `TokenOwnership` struct at `tokenId` without reverting.
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is out of bounds:
     *
     * - `addr = address(0)`
     * - `startTimestamp = 0`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = 0`
     *
     * If the `tokenId` is burned:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner before token was burned>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp when token was burned>`
     * - `burned = true`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data when token was burned>`
     *
     * Otherwise:
     *
     * - `addr = <Address of owner>`
     * - `startTimestamp = <Timestamp of start of ownership>`
     * - `burned = false`
     * - `extraData = <Extra data at start of ownership>`
     */
    function explicitOwnershipOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (TokenOwnership memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of `TokenOwnership` structs at `tokenIds` in order.
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-explicitOwnershipOf}
     */
    function explicitOwnershipsOf(uint256[] memory tokenIds) external view returns (TokenOwnership[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`,
     * in the range [`start`, `stop`)
     * (i.e. `start <= tokenId < stop`).
     *
     * This function allows for tokens to be queried if the collection
     * grows too big for a single call of {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwner}.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `start < stop`
     */
    function tokensOfOwnerIn(
        address owner,
        uint256 start,
        uint256 stop
    ) external view returns (uint256[] memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns an array of token IDs owned by `owner`.
     *
     * This function scans the ownership mapping and is O(`totalSupply`) in complexity.
     * It is meant to be called off-chain.
     *
     * See {ERC721AQueryable-tokensOfOwnerIn} for splitting the scan into
     * multiple smaller scans if the collection is large enough to cause
     * an out-of-gas error (10K collections should be fine).
     */
    function tokensOfOwner(address owner) external view returns (uint256[] memory);
}

// SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
// ERC721A Contracts v4.2.3
// Creator: Chiru Labs

pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

/**
 * @dev Interface of ERC721A.
 */
interface IERC721A {
    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error ApprovalCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error ApprovalQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * Cannot query the balance for the zero address.
     */
    error BalanceQueryForZeroAddress();

    /**
     * Cannot mint to the zero address.
     */
    error MintToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The quantity of tokens minted must be more than zero.
     */
    error MintZeroQuantity();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error OwnerQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     */
    error TransferCallerNotOwnerNorApproved();

    /**
     * The token must be owned by `from`.
     */
    error TransferFromIncorrectOwner();

    /**
     * Cannot safely transfer to a contract that does not implement the
     * ERC721Receiver interface.
     */
    error TransferToNonERC721ReceiverImplementer();

    /**
     * Cannot transfer to the zero address.
     */
    error TransferToZeroAddress();

    /**
     * The token does not exist.
     */
    error URIQueryForNonexistentToken();

    /**
     * The `quantity` minted with ERC2309 exceeds the safety limit.
     */
    error MintERC2309QuantityExceedsLimit();

    /**
     * The `extraData` cannot be set on an unintialized ownership slot.
     */
    error OwnershipNotInitializedForExtraData();

    // =============================================================
    //                            STRUCTS
    // =============================================================

    struct TokenOwnership {
        // The address of the owner.
        address addr;
        // Stores the start time of ownership with minimal overhead for tokenomics.
        uint64 startTimestamp;
        // Whether the token has been burned.
        bool burned;
        // Arbitrary data similar to `startTimestamp` that can be set via {_extraData}.
        uint24 extraData;
    }

    // =============================================================
    //                         TOKEN COUNTERS
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the total number of tokens in existence.
     * Burned tokens will reduce the count.
     * To get the total number of tokens minted, please see {_totalMinted}.
     */
    function totalSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC165
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns true if this contract implements the interface defined by
     * `interfaceId`. See the corresponding
     * [EIP section](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-165#how-interfaces-are-identified)
     * to learn more about how these ids are created.
     *
     * This function call must use less than 30000 gas.
     */
    function supportsInterface(bytes4 interfaceId) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                            IERC721
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `tokenId` token is transferred from `from` to `to`.
     */
    event Transfer(address indexed from, address indexed to, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables `approved` to manage the `tokenId` token.
     */
    event Approval(address indexed owner, address indexed approved, uint256 indexed tokenId);

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when `owner` enables or disables
     * (`approved`) `operator` to manage all of its assets.
     */
    event ApprovalForAll(address indexed owner, address indexed operator, bool approved);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the number of tokens in `owner`'s account.
     */
    function balanceOf(address owner) external view returns (uint256 balance);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the owner of the `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function ownerOf(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address owner);

    /**
     * @dev Safely transfers `tokenId` token from `from` to `to`,
     * checking first that contract recipients are aware of the ERC721 protocol
     * to prevent tokens from being forever locked.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must exist and be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be have been allowed to move
     * this token by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     * - If `to` refers to a smart contract, it must implement
     * {IERC721Receiver-onERC721Received}, which is called upon a safe transfer.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId,
        bytes calldata data
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Equivalent to `safeTransferFrom(from, to, tokenId, '')`.
     */
    function safeTransferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Transfers `tokenId` from `from` to `to`.
     *
     * WARNING: Usage of this method is discouraged, use {safeTransferFrom}
     * whenever possible.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `from` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `to` cannot be the zero address.
     * - `tokenId` token must be owned by `from`.
     * - If the caller is not `from`, it must be approved to move this token
     * by either {approve} or {setApprovalForAll}.
     *
     * Emits a {Transfer} event.
     */
    function transferFrom(
        address from,
        address to,
        uint256 tokenId
    ) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Gives permission to `to` to transfer `tokenId` token to another account.
     * The approval is cleared when the token is transferred.
     *
     * Only a single account can be approved at a time, so approving the
     * zero address clears previous approvals.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The caller must own the token or be an approved operator.
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     *
     * Emits an {Approval} event.
     */
    function approve(address to, uint256 tokenId) external payable;

    /**
     * @dev Approve or remove `operator` as an operator for the caller.
     * Operators can call {transferFrom} or {safeTransferFrom}
     * for any token owned by the caller.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - The `operator` cannot be the caller.
     *
     * Emits an {ApprovalForAll} event.
     */
    function setApprovalForAll(address operator, bool _approved) external;

    /**
     * @dev Returns the account approved for `tokenId` token.
     *
     * Requirements:
     *
     * - `tokenId` must exist.
     */
    function getApproved(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (address operator);

    /**
     * @dev Returns if the `operator` is allowed to manage all of the assets of `owner`.
     *
     * See {setApprovalForAll}.
     */
    function isApprovedForAll(address owner, address operator) external view returns (bool);

    // =============================================================
    //                        IERC721Metadata
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection name.
     */
    function name() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the token collection symbol.
     */
    function symbol() external view returns (string memory);

    /**
     * @dev Returns the Uniform Resource Identifier (URI) for `tokenId` token.
     */
    function tokenURI(uint256 tokenId) external view returns (string memory);

    // =============================================================
    //                           IERC2309
    // =============================================================

    /**
     * @dev Emitted when tokens in `fromTokenId` to `toTokenId`
     * (inclusive) is transferred from `from` to `to`, as defined in the
     * [ERC2309](https://eips.ethereum.org/EIPS/eip-2309) standard.
     *
     * See {_mintERC2309} for more details.
     */
    event ConsecutiveTransfer(uint256 indexed fromTokenId, uint256 toTokenId, address indexed from, address indexed to);
}

//SPDX-License-Identifier: MIT
pragma solidity ^0.8.4;

import "erc721a/contracts/extensions/IERC721AQueryable.sol";

interface IERC721M is IERC721AQueryable {
    error CannotIncreaseMaxMintableSupply();
    error CosignerNotSet();
    error CrossmintAddressNotSet();
    error CrossmintOnly();
    error GlobalWalletLimitOverflow();
    error InsufficientStageTimeGap();
    error InvalidCosignSignature();
    error InvalidProof();
    error InvalidStage();
    error InvalidStageArgsLength();
    error InvalidStartAndEndTimestamp();
    error NoSupplyLeft();
    error NotAuthorized();
    error NotEnoughValue();
    error NotMintable();
    error Mintable();
    error StageSupplyExceeded();
    error TimestampExpired();
    error TransferFailed();
    error WalletGlobalLimitExceeded();
    error WalletStageLimitExceeded();
    error WithdrawFailed();
    error WrongMintCurrency();
    error NotSupported();

    struct MintStageInfo {
        uint80 price;
        uint80 mintFee;
        uint32 walletLimit; // 0 for unlimited
        bytes32 merkleRoot; // 0x0 for no presale enforced
        uint24 maxStageSupply; // 0 for unlimited
        uint64 startTimeUnixSeconds;
        uint64 endTimeUnixSeconds;
    }

    event UpdateStage(
        uint256 stage,
        uint80 price,
        uint80 mintFee,
        uint32 walletLimit,
        bytes32 merkleRoot,
        uint24 maxStageSupply,
        uint64 startTimeUnixSeconds,
        uint64 endTimeUnixSeconds
    );

    event SetCosigner(address cosigner);
    event SetCrossmintAddress(address crossmintAddress);
    event SetMintable(bool mintable);
    event SetMaxMintableSupply(uint256 maxMintableSupply);
    event SetGlobalWalletLimit(uint256 globalWalletLimit);
    event SetActiveStage(uint256 activeStage);
    event SetBaseURI(string baseURI);
    event SetTimestampExpirySeconds(uint64 expiry);
    event SetMintCurrency(address mintCurrency);
    event Withdraw(uint256 value);
    event WithdrawERC20(address mintCurrency, uint256 value);

    function getNumberStages() external view returns (uint256);

    function getGlobalWalletLimit() external view returns (uint256);

    function getMaxMintableSupply() external view returns (uint256);

    function totalMintedByAddress(address a) external view returns (uint256);

    function getCosignNonce(address minter) external view returns (uint256);

    function getStageInfo(
        uint256 index
    ) external view returns (MintStageInfo memory, uint32, uint256);

    function mint(
        uint32 qty,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;

    function mintWithLimit(
        uint32 qty,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;

    function crossmint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;

    function authorizedMint(
        uint32 qty,
        address to,
        uint32 limit,
        bytes32[] calldata proof,
        uint64 timestamp,
        bytes calldata signature
    ) external payable;
}

Context size (optional):